Mitsubishi

SAFETY PRECAUTION
(Always read these instructions before using the products.)
When designing the system, always read the relevant manuals and give sufficient consideration to
safety.
During the exercise, pay full attention to the following points and handle the product correctly.
[EXERCISE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Do not touch the terminals while the power is on to prevent electric shock.
Before opening the safety cover, make sure to turn off the power or ensure the safety.
Do not touch the movable portion.
CAUTION
Follow the instructor's direction during the exercise.
Do not remove the module of the demonstration machine or change wirings without permission.
Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire.
Turn off the power before installing or removing the module.

Failure to do so may result in malfunctions of the module or electric shock.
When the demonstration machine (such as X/Y table) emits abnormal odor/sound, press "Power
switch" or "Emergency switch" to turn off.
When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible.

REVISIONS
*The textbook number is written at the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date *Textbook number Revision

Oct., 2012 SH-081123ENG-A First edition
This textbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this textbook.
© 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 1- 1 to 1-14
1.1 Program··········································································································································· 1- 1
1.2 Program Processing Procedure ······································································································ 1- 4
1.3 MELSEC-QnUD Module Configuration ··························································································· 1- 5
1.4 External I/O Signal and I/O Number······························································································· 1-11
1.5 System Configuration and I/O Number of Demonstration Machine··············································· 1-14
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX Works2 2- 1 to 2-64
2.1 Features of GX Works2··················································································································· 2- 3

2.1.1 MELSOFT iQ Works················································································································· 2- 7
2.2 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Works2 ··································································· 2- 9
2.2.1 Screen configuration in GX Works2 ························································································· 2- 9
2.2.2 Ladder editor···························································································································· 2-11
2.2.3 Project······································································································································ 2-20
2.3 Operation Before Creating Ladder Program ·················································································· 2-22
2.3.1 Starting up GX Works2············································································································ 2-22
2.3.2 Creating a new project············································································································· 2-23
2.4 Preparation for Starting Up CPU···································································································· 2-25
2.5 Creating Ladder Program··············································································································· 2-32
2.5.1 Creating a ladder program using the function keys································································· 2-32
2.5.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons ··································································· 2-34
2.6 Converting Program (Ladder Conversion) ····················································································· 2-36
2.7 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU······················································· 2-37
2.8 Monitoring Ladder Program Status ································································································ 2-40
2.9 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU ··················································································· 2-43
2.10 Editing Ladder Program ··············································································································· 2-45
2.10.1 Modifying a part of the ladder program ················································································· 2-45
2.10.2 Drawing/deleting lines ··········································································································· 2-47
2.10.3 Inserting/deleting rows··········································································································· 2-50
2.10.4 Cutting/copying ladder program ···························································································· 2-55
2.11 Verifying Data······························································································································· 2-58
2.12 Saving Ladder Program ··············································································································· 2-59
2.12.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects ······································································· 2-59
2.12.2 Saving a project with another name ······················································································ 2-60
2.13 Reading the saved project ··········································································································· 2-61
2.14 Opening Projects in Different Format··························································································· 2-62
2.15 Saving Projects in Different Format ····························································································· 2-63
CHAPTER 3 DEVICE AND PARAMETER OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 3- 1 to 3- 6
3.1 Device·············································································································································· 3- 1
3.2 Parameter········································································································································ 3- 3
(1)
CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE AND BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -PART 1- 4- 1 to 4-42
4.1 List of Instruction Explained in this Chapter ···················································································· 4- 1

4.2 Differences between OUT and SET / RST ································································ 4- 4
4.3 Measuring Timer ····························································································································· 4- 5
4.4 Counting by Counter ······················································································································· 4- 6
4.5 PLS / PLF ·························································································································· 4-14
4.6 MC / MCR ·························································································································· 4-20
4.7 FEND / CJ / SCJ / CALL / RET ············································································ 4-24
4.7.1 FEND ······························································································································· 4-24
4.7.2 CJ / SCJ ·················································································································· 4-27
4.7.3 CALL(P) / RET ········································································································ 4-31
4.8 Exercise·········································································································································· 4-35
Project name QTEST 1
4.8.1 Exercise 1 LD to NOP··········································································································· 4-35
4.8.2 Exercise 2 SET, RST ············································································································
Project name QTEST2 4-36
4.8.3 Exercise 3 PLS, PLF·············································································································
4.8.4 Exercise 4 CJ, CALL, RET, FEND························································································
CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION -PART 2- 5- 1 to 5-58
5.1 Notation of Values (Data) ················································································································ 5- 1

5.2 Transfer Instruction ························································································································· 5- 9
5.2.1 MOV (P) ··························································································································· 5- 9
5.2.2 BIN (P) ····························································································································· 5-16
5.2.3 BCD (P) ··························································································································· 5-18
5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and transferring data ············································ 5-21
5.2.5 FMOV (P) / BMOV (P) ································································································ 5-22
5.3 Comparison Operation Instruction ································································································· 5-27
5.4 Arithmetic Operation Instruction····································································································· 5-32
5.4.1 +(P) / -(P) ···················································································································· 5-32
5.4.2 * (P) / / (P) ··················································································································· 5-36
5.4.3 32-bit data instructions and their necessity ············································································· 5-41
5.4.4 Calculation examples for multiplication and division including decimal points ······················· 5-43
5.5 Index Register and File Register···································································································· 5-44
5.5.1 How to use index register Z····································································································· 5-44
5.5.2 How to use file register R ········································································································ 5-46
5.6 External Setting of Timer/Counter Set Value and External Display of Current Value ··················· 5-49
5.7 Exercise·········································································································································· 5-51
5.7.1 Exercise 1 MOV ····················································································································
5.7.2 Exercise 2 BIN and BCD conversion ····················································································
5.7.3 Exercise 3 FMOV··················································································································
5.7.4 Exercise 4 Comparison instruction ·······················································································
5.7.5 Exercise 5 Addition and subtraction instructions ··································································
5.7.6 Exercise 6 Multiplication and division instructions································································
5.7.7 Exercise 7 D-multiplication and D-division ···········································································
(2)
CHAPTER 6 HOW TO USE OTHER FUNCTIONS 6- 1 to 6-36
6.1 Test Function at Online ··················································································································· 6- 1

6.1.1 Turning on and off the device "Y" forcibly ················································································ 6- 2
6.1.2 Setting and resetting the device "M"························································································· 6- 4
6.1.3 Changing the current value of the device "T" ··········································································· 6- 5
6.1.4 Reading error steps ·················································································································· 6- 6
6.1.5 Remote STOP and RUN ·········································································································· 6- 7
6.2 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings··············································································· 6- 8
6.3 How to Use Retentive Timers ········································································································ 6-10
6.4 Device Batch Replacement············································································································ 6-12
6.4.1 Batch replacement of device numbers ··················································································· 6- 12
6.4.2 Batch change of specified devices between normally open contacts
and normally closed contacts································································································· 6- 13
6.5 Online Program Change ················································································································ 6-14
6.6 Registering Devices ······················································································································· 6-15
6.7 How to Create Comments ·············································································································· 6-16
6.8 Setting Security for Projects ··········································································································· 6-23
6.8.1 Setting and resetting security for projects ··············································································· 6-24
6.8.2 Managing (adding, deleting, and changing) users ·································································· 6-25
6.8.3 Logging in projects ·················································································································· 6-29
6.8.4 Changing access authority for each access level ··································································· 6-30
6.9 Sampling Trace Function ··············································································································· 6-31
CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE 7- 1 to 7-26
7.1 Intelligent Function Module ············································································································· 7- 1

7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs ········································ 7- 2
7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs ·················································································································· 7- 3
7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules····························································· 7- 4
7.3 Communication with Intelligent Function Module············································································ 7- 5
7.3.1 Communication methods with intelligent function modules······················································ 7- 5
7.4 Intelligent Function Module System in Demonstration Machine ····················································· 7- 6
7.5 Q64AD Analog/Digital Converter Module ······················································································· 7- 7
7.5.1 Names of parts ························································································································· 7- 7
7.5.2 A/D conversion characteristics ································································································· 7- 8
7.5.3 List of I/O signals and buffer memory assignment ··································································· 7- 9
7.5.4 Adding or setting intelligent function module data··································································· 7-12
7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine··············································································· 7-16
7.6 Q62DAN Digital/Analog Converter Module···················································································· 7-17
7.6.1 Names of parts ························································································································ 7-17
7.6.2 D/A conversion characteristics ································································································ 7-18
7.6.3 List of I/O signals and buffer memory assignment ·································································· 7-19
7.6.4 Adding or setting intelligent function module data··································································· 7-21
7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine··············································································· 7-25
(3)
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION FUNCTION 8- 1 to 8- 4
8.1 Simulation Function························································································································· 8- 1

8.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation ··········································································································· 8- 1
8.3 Debugging with Example Program·································································································· 8- 2
8.3.1 Monitoring and testing device status ························································································ 8- 3
CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE 9- 1 to 9- 8
9.1 Typical Trouble································································································································ 9- 1

9.2 Maintenance···································································································································· 9- 2
9.3 Consumable Product······················································································································· 9- 3
9.4 Service Life of Output Relay············································································································ 9- 4
9.5 Spare Product ································································································································· 9- 5
9.6 Using Support Equipment ··············································································································· 9- 7
APPENDIX App.- 1 to App.- 80
Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode ··········································································································· App.- 1

1.1 Direct mode ··························································································································· App.- 1
1.2 Refresh mode ························································································································ App.- 2
1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode ···················································App.- 3
Appendix 2 Special Relay ················································································································ App.- 4
Appendix 3 Special Register ············································································································ App.- 5
Appendix 4 Application Program Example······················································································· App.- 6
4.1 Flip-flop ladder ······················································································································· App.- 6
4.2 One shot ladder ····················································································································· App.- 8
4.3 Long-time timer······················································································································ App.- 9
4.4 Off delay timer ······················································································································ App.-10
4.5 On delay timer (momentary input) ························································································ App.-11
4.6 ON-OFF repeat ladder·········································································································· App.-12
4.7 Preventing chattering input··································································································· App.-12
4.8 Ladders with a common line································································································· App.-13
4.9 Time control program············································································································ App.-14
4.10 Clock ladder························································································································ App.-15
4.10.1 Clock function (supplement) ························································································· App.-16
4.11 Starting - operation of electrical machinery····························································· App.-18
4.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit ···················································App.-19
4.13 Retentive timer···················································································································· App.-20
4.14 Switching timer set value externally ··················································································· App.-21
4.15 Setting counters externally ································································································· App.-22
4.16 Measuring operation time ··································································································· App.-24
4.17 Measuring cycle time ·········································································································· App.-24
4.18 Application example of (D) CML (P) ··················································································· App.-25
4.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals ···················· App.-26
4.20 Carriage line control············································································································ App.-29
4.21 Compressor sequential operation using ring counters······················································· App.-31
4.22 Application example of positioning control ·········································································App.-35
4.23 Application example using index Z ····················································································· App.-36
4.24 Application example of FIFO instruction············································································· App.-38
(4)
4.25 Application example of data shift························································································App.-41
4.26 Example of operation program calculating square root of data··········································App.-44
4.27 Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data···········································App.-45
4.28 Program using digital switch to import data········································································App.-46
4.29 Displaying number of faults and fault numbers using fault detection program ·················· App.-47
Appendix 5 Memory and File to be Handled by CPU Module························································· App.-51
Appendix 6 Comparison with GX Developer (changes) ································································· App.-53
Appendix 7 Customizing Shortcut Keys ··························································································App.-62
Appendix 8 Indexing························································································································ App.-64
Appendix 9 FB ································································································································· App.-68
9.1 FB ········································································································································· App.-68
9.1.1 Conversion into components ·························································································· App.-68
9.1.2 Advantages of using FBs································································································ App.-69
9.1.3 FB Libraries ···················································································································· App.-71
9.1.4 Development tool············································································································ App.-73
9.1.5 FB specifications and precautions·················································································· App.-73
9.2 Creating a program by using an FB library···········································································App.-74
9.2.1 Programs to be created ··································································································App.-74
9.2.2 Preparations prior to use of FB libraries········································································· App.-75
9.2.3 Importing an FB library to projects ················································································· App.-76
9.2.4 Pasting FBs ···················································································································· App.-77
9.2.5 Setting names of the pasted FBs ··················································································· App.-78
9.2.6 Creating input and output ladders ·················································································· App.-79
9.2.7 Performing conversion/compilation ················································································ App.-79
9.2.8 Writing sequence programs ··························································································· App.-80
9.2.9 Operation check ············································································································· App.-80
(5)
INTRODUCTION
This textbook explains the programmable controller, the program editing methods
with GX Works2, the sequence instructions and the application instructions for
understanding the MELSEC-Q series programming.
The multiple CPU system is available for the MELSEC-Q series with multiple CPU
modules, but this textbook explains the case in which one CPU module is used.
The related manuals are shown below.
(1) QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

····························································································· SH-(NA)080483ENG
Explains the hardware.
(2) QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
····························································································· SH(NA)-080807ENG
Explains the functions and programming method.
(3) MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction)
····························································································· SH(NA)-080809ENG
Explains details of each instruction.
(4) GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)
····························································································· SH(NA)-080787ENG
(5) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
····························································································· SH(NA)-080779ENG
(6) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
····························································································· SH(NA)-080780ENG
(7) Before Using the Product
··········································································································· BCN-P5782
(8) Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual
·····································································································SH(NA)-080055
(9) Digital-Analog Converter Module User's Manual
·····································································································SH(NA)-080054
(10) I/O Module Type Building Block User's Manual
·····································································································SH(NA)-080042
(11) MELSOFT GX Works2 FB Quick Start Guide
········································································································· L-08182ENG
(6)
CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
1.1 Program
If a programmable controller is assumed as a control ladder, it can be described by

an input ladder, output ladder, and internal sequential operation.
PLC
PB1 X6 T1
Y70
X0 Y74 PL
Y71
LS1 X1 Output relay
Y74
Y72
X2
Y73 Electromagnetic
PB2 X3 K30 valve
Y74 X6
Y74
X4 T1 MC
Y75 Magnet
X5 Timer
contactor
Sensor Y76
X6
Input relay Contacts for

(virtual coil) external
outputs
COM COM
(+) (-)
Input circuit Internal sequential operation Output circuit Output module

Input module
Turns on/off the Activates the Transmits the on/off Activates the
input relay with internal sequential operations of the external loading.
external signal. operation by the output relay.
contact of the input relay.
Figure 1.1 Programmable controller configuration
A programmable controller is an electronic device centered around microcomputers.

Actually, a programmable controller is assemblies of relays, timers, and counters.
As shown in figure 1.1, the internal sequential operation is executed by turning on or
off the coil. The on/off condition of the coil depends on the connection condition (in
series or in parallel) and results of the normally open or normally closed contacts
"Relay", which is also called an electromagnetic relay, is a switch to relay signals. The relay is a key component to
make up a logic ladder.
1) Energizing the coil Magnetization Coil off Coil on
• The normally open contact closes. (always) (in operation)
(Conducted) Normally open Not conducted Conducted
• The normally closed contact opens. Coil contact
Common
(Not conducted) Normally
2) De-energizing the coil closed contact Conducted Not conducted
Demagnetization
• The normally open contact opens.
Normally Normally
(Not conducted)
closed contact
• The normally closed contact closes. open contact
(Conducted)
1-1
Internal Sequential Operation
The following shows the signal flow of the internal sequential operation of
figure 1.1.
1) When the sensor turns on, the coil of the input relay X6 is magnetized.
2) Magnetizing the coil of the input relay X6 conducts the normally open
contact X6 and magnetizes the coil of the output relay Y74.
(As the timer is not magnetized at this time, the normally closed
contact remains conducted.)
3) Once the coil of the output relay Y74 is magnetized, the external
output contact Y74 is conducted and the magnetic contactor (MC) is
turned on.
4) Turning off the sensor demagnetizes the coil of the input relay X6 and
the normally open contact X6 becomes non-conductive.
As the self-maintaining normally open contact Y74 is conducted, the
coil remains magnetized. (Self-maintaining operation)
5) When the coil of the output relay Y74 is magnetized (with the normally
open contact Y74 conducted), turning off the sensor (with normally
closed contact X6 conducted) magnetizes the coil of the timer T1 and
the timer starts measuring the time.
After three sec. (K30 indicates 3.0sec.), the normally open contact of
the timer becomes conducted and the normally closed contact
becomes non-conductive.
6) As a result, the coil of the output relay Y74 demagnetizes and the load
magnet contactor drops.
Also, the output relay self-maintenance is released.
Operation diagram
The following time chart explains the input/output relays and timer
operations.
Input X6
Output Y74
Timer T1 (Coil)
Timer T1 (Contact)
3 sec.
1-2
The internal sequential operation can be regarded as the program of
the programmable controller. The program is saved in the program
memory as similar to the instruction list
Instruction
X6 T1 Step number Device
word
0 Y74
0 LD X6
Y74 1 OR Y74
2 ANI T1
K30 Repeat
Y74 X6 3 OUT Y74
operation
4 T1 4 LD Y74
5 ANI X6
10 END
6 OUT T1 K30
10 END
(a) Ladder diagram (b) Instruction list (program list)
Figure 1.2 Program
• A program consists of a large number of instruction words and

devices.
• The instructions contain instruction words and devices. In addition,

the instructions are numbered to represent the order of operations.
The numbers are called step numbers.
(Instruction words are also called instructions.)
• The number of steps varies depending on the types of instructions

or the setting method for the values to be used for the I/O numbers
and operations. (The more steps are needed for the operation with
complicated operation.)
• The instructions repeat from the step number 0 to the END

instruction. (This is called "repeat operation", "cyclic operation" or
"scanning".)
Amount of time necessary for one cycle is called operation cycle
(scan time).
• The number of steps from the step number 0 to the END instruction
is the length or size of the program.
• The program is stored in the program memory inside the CPU. The
operation is executed in a ladder block unit.
One ladder block ranges from the operation start instruction (LD,
LDI) to the OUT instruction (including the data instruction).
1-3
1.2 Program Processing Procedure
The operation process is executed in series from the start step of the program
memory left to right and top to bottom (in the order of 1), 2) ... 17)) in a ladder block
unit as shown below.
1) 2) 3)
X0 X1
0 Y10
4) 5) 7)
X2 X3
3 Y11
6)
X4
8) 9) 10)
X5 X6
7 Y12
11) 12)
X7
Y13
13) 14)
X8
Y14
15) 16) 17)

X9 XA
17 Y15
1-4
1.3 MELSEC-QnUD Module Configuration
(1) Universal model

The Universal model QCPU is used for a training in this textbook, therefore,
"QCPU" indicates "Universal model QCPU" unless otherwise noted.
(2) Basic configuration of a programmable controller system
The following figure shows an actual programmable controller configuration.
Memory card
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT)

Q7BAT-SET Universal model QCPU
Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Battery holder Battery for QCPU (Q7BAT)
Q8BAT-SET
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU (Q8BAT) Extension cable

Power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module/Special function module
Q5 B extension base unit

Q6 B extension base unit
Figure 1.3 MELSEC-QnUD module configuration (when Q3 DB is used)
1-5
Base Unit
Main base unit Extension base unit

(Requiring a power (Not requiring a power
supply module) supply module)
Power supply
Power supply
CPU
With three
I/O modules Q52B
(For two modules)
Q33B Q63B
Power supply
Power supply
CPU
With five
I/O modules
Q35B Q65B Q55B
Power supply
Power supply
CPU
With eight
I/O modules
Q38B Q68B
Power supply
Power supply
CPU
With 12
I/O modules
Q312B Q612B
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit

Power supply
CPU
With eight
I/O modules
Q38DB
Power supply
CPU
With 12
I/O modules
Q312DB
• The main roles of the base unit are; fixing the power supply module,
CPU module, and I/O modules, supplying 5VDC power from the
power supply module to the CPU module and I/O modules, and
transmitting the control signals to each module.
1-6
Power Supply Module
Module name Input Output

Q61P 100V to 240VAC 5VDC 6A
Q62P 100V to 240VAC 5VDC 3A, 24VDC 0.6A
Q63P 24VDC 5VDC 6A
100V to 120V/AC200 to
Q64P(N) 5VDC 8.5A
240VAC
Q61P-D 100V to 240VAC 5VDC 6A
CPU Module
Maximum I/O points for
Program capacity Basic instruction
CPU type connecting to a
(maximum) processing speed
programmable controller
Q00UJCPU 10K steps 120ns 256 points
Q00UCPU 10K steps 80ns 1024 points
Q03UD(E)CPU 30K steps 20ns
Q04UD(E)HCPU 40K steps
Q13UD(E)HCPU 130K steps 4096 points
9.5ns
Q50UDEHCPU 500K steps
Q100UDEHCPU 1000K steps
I/O Module
I/O points
8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Format
120VAC – – –
240VAC – – –
Input module
24VDC (positive common) –

24VDC (high-speed input) – – –
24VDC
– –
(negative common)
5/12VDC –
Contact output – – –
Output module
Independent contact
– – –
output
Triac output – – –
Transistor output (sink)
Transistor output (source) – –
I/O mixed – –
1-7
Memory Card
A QCPU equips a built-in memory as standard for storing parameters and
programs, therefore, the programs can be executed without a memory card.
The memory cards are required for the situations in the table below.
Type Description
Data can be written or changed within the memory capacity.
<Example of the usage>
• For the boot operation
SRAM card
• For storing the sampling trace data
• For storing the SFC trace data
• For storing the error history data
The contents of the program memory or the specified file can be written at a time.
The newly written data replaces all original data. Data can be read by the READ instruction of
the sequence program.
Flash card
• When the changing the data is unnecessary
Data can be written or changed within the program capacity.
Programmable controller user data of an ATA card can be accessed by the file access
instruction (such as the FWRITE instruction) in a sequence program through a CSV format or
ATA card binary format.
• For programmable controller user data (general-purpose data)
• Memory cards are required when the data capacity exceeds

the capacity of the built-in program memory, standard RAM,
and standard ROM.
• Select the memory card according to the size of the program
or the type of the data to be stored.
• Install the enclosed backup battery before using the
Memory Card
SRAM-type RAM card first. The SRAM card data cannot be
baked up unless the battery is installed.
• Format the memory card before using it.
• Data can be written to a Flash card for 100,000 times, and
for an ATA card, data can be written for 1,000,000 times.
1-8
<Reference: Universal model QCPU memory system configuration>
The memory of the Universal model QCPU consists of the following blocks.
Program memory
RAM
(program cache memory)
Parameter Program Parameter Program
Device comment Device initial value Device comment Device initial value
Standard File register Local device

ROM
Parameter Program Sampling
trace file
Device comment Device initial value

Memory card ROM
*1
Programmable Parameter Program
controller user data CPU module
Storage file used in latch Device comment Device initial value

data backup function
File register
File used in
SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD function
Standard
RAM *2
File register Local device
Sampling Module error

trace file collection file
*1: A memory card cannot be used for Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU.

*2: Q00UJCPU has no standard RAM.
• Program memory: A memory for storing programs and parameters for a CPU module
operation
A program operation is executed by transferring a program stored in
the program memory to the program cache memory.
• Program cache memory: A memory for operating programs
A program operation is executed by transferring a program stored in
the program memory to the program cache memory.
• Standard RAM: A memory for using file registers, local devices, and sampling trace
files without a memory card
Using the standard RAM as the file registers enables the high-speed
access as well as data registers.
The standard RAM is also used for storing the module error
collection file.
• Standard ROM: A memory for storing data such as parameters and programs
• Memory card (RAM): A card for storing the local device, debug data, SFC trace data, and
error history data with the parameters and program.
• Memory card (ROM): A Flash card for storing parameters, programs, and file registers.
An ATA card stores parameters, programs, and the programmable
controller user data (general-purpose files).
1-9
POINT
Secure backup by long-term storage

Programs and parameter files are automatically backed up to the program
memory (Flash ROM) which does not require a battery backup. This prevents a
loss of the program and parameter data due to the flat battery.
The battery backup time is also reduced significantly.
In addition, the important data (such as device data) can be backed up to the
standard ROM to prevent a loss of the data due to the flat battery in case of
consecutive holidays.
The backup data is restored automatically when the power is turned on next
time.
CPU built-in memory No battery
required
Program memory
(Flash ROM) for data
No battery protection
Program
Write programs cache memory backup
(SRAM) needed!
For program
Programming execution
tool
Device data
Backup Latch data
Device memory execution Backup
condition is file
ON (Standard ROM)
File register
(Standard RAM)
1 - 10
1.4 External I/O Signal and I/O Number
(1) Wiring of I/O devices

The signals output from the external input devices are substituted by the input
numbers which are determined by the installation positions and terminal
numbers of the connected input module and used in a program.
For the operation results output (coil), use the output numbers which are
determined by the installation position and the terminal number of the output
module to which the external output module is connected.
0 1 2 3 4 Slot numbers
(Power (CPU)
supply)
(QY)
(QX) Base unit
Input numbers Output numbers
Y10
PB1 V1
X0
CS1 Y11
X1 V2
CS2 Input numbers are hexadecimal numbers that start
X2 with 0. Input/output numbers share the same numbers.
Y12
PB2 V3
"X" at the beginning of the number represents "Input",
X3
and "Y" indicates "Output".
PB3 Y13
X4 RL
The maximum number of the QCPU (Q mode)
LS1 input/output number is 4,096.
X5 Y14
GL
LS2 The input/output number is sometimes referred
X6
Y15 to as the I/O number (IN/OUT).
LS3 MC1
X7
LS4 Y16
X8
MC2
PB4
X9
Y17
PB5 MC3
XA
CS3 COM1
XB
XC
Y18
XD
Y1F
XE
XF COM2
COM
Output module
Input module
Figure 1.4 Wiring of I/O devices
1 - 11
(2) I/O numbers of a main base unit
The I/O numbers of I/O modules which are attached to a main base unit are
assigned as follows. This configuration applies to both I/O modules and
intelligent function modules.
Main base unit(Q33B,Q35B,Q38D)B,Q312(D)B)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot numbers
Power supply module
I/O numbers
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
90 to 9F
B0 to BF
80 to 8F
A0 to AF
CPU
Base unit with

three slots(Q33B)
Base unit with five slots(Q35B)
Base unit with eight slots(Q38(D)B)
Base unit with 12 slots(Q312(D)B)
H
• The I/O numbers of one slot (one module) are assigned in ascending order in 16-point unit (0 to F ).
As a standard, 16-point modules should be attached to all slots.
For example, the following figure shows the I/O numbers of when a 32-point module is attached to the fifth slot.
Main base unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
The I/O numbers of the
Power supply module
50 to 5F / 60 to 6F
slot next to the one with

00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
70 to 7F
80 to 8F
32-point modules are

CPU
changed.
(The numbers are
assigned in order from
lower numbers.)
• The I/O numbers are also assigned to a vacant slot (a slot with no I/O module installed).
For example, if the third slot is vacant, the I/O numbers are assigned as shown below. (in the initial setting)
The number of assigned points can be changed by the setting.
Main base unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
Power supply module
Vacant slot
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
40 to 4F
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
(30 to 3F)
CPU
• For the multiple CPU configuration (two to four CPUs), the I/O numbers are assigned from a slot next to a slot where
a CPU is attached.
1 - 12
(3) I/O numbers of an extension base unit
Connect an extension base unit when the number of slots of the main base unit
is insufficient.
The I/O numbers are assigned as follows in the initial setting.
This configuration applies to both I/O modules and intelligent function modules.
Main base unit (Q38(D)B)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
Power supply module
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
60 to 6F
20 to 2F
50 to 5F
70 to 7F
CPU
Extension cable
Extension base unit (Q68B)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Power supply module
C0 to CF
D0 to DF
A0 to AF
B0 to BF
E0 to EF
F0 to FF
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
(Note)
First extension
Parameters allow the setting different from the
base unit
actual number of slots.
For example, a base unit for 12 slots can be set as
a base unit for 3 slots and vice versa.
(Q65B) This is in order to handle the future extension, and
to prevent the gap of I/O numbers which is likely to
happen when a conventional system is shifted to the
16 17 18 19 20 new one.
For details, refer to the QnUCPU User's Manual
Power supply module
100 to 10F
110 to 11F
120 to 12F
130 to 13F
140 to 14F
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals).
Second
extension base
unit
Extension base unit (Q68B)
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Power supply module
1C0 to 1CF
1A0 to 1AF
1B0 to 1BF
150 to 15F
160 to 16F
170 to 17F
180 to 18F
190 to 19F
Third extension
base unit
• The slots of the extension base unit are also assigned in ascending order in 16-point unit.
• The start I/O number of the extension base unit is assigned from the last number of the main base unit or of the
previous extension base unit.
• Setting "0" to the parameter can assign the I/O number to the vacant slot or areas with no slot.
The following table shows the number of available extension base units.
CPU type Number of stages (including the ones
connected with GOT in bus connection)
Universal model Q00UJCPU 2
Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU 4
Other than the above 7
1 - 13
1.5 System Configuration and I/O Number of Demonstration Machine
CPU module Output module

Power supply module Input module
Base unit Q38DB
Q61P QCPU Vacant QX QY Q64 Q62

slot 42 42P AD DAN
(64 (64 (16 (16
points) points) points) points)
X0 Y40
to to
USB cable X3F Y7F
Peripheral device
I/O panel
Y6F Y60 Y5F Y50 Y4F Y40
Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78
X3F X30 X2F X20

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
ON 1 9 4 2 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q
OFF
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 A/D INPUT D/A OUTPUT
ON
OFF
1 - 14
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX Works2
GX Works2 is a programming tool for designing, debugging, and maintaining

programs on Windows®.
GX Works2 has improved functionality and operability, with easier-to-use features
compared to existing GX Developer.
Main functions of GX Works2

GX Works2 can manage programs and parameters in units of projects for each
programmable controller CPU.
Programming
Programs can be created in a Simple project in a similar way with existing
GX Developer.
Structured programming in a Structured project is also available with GX
Works2.
Setting parameters
The parameters for programmable controller CPUs and network
parameters can be set with GX Works2.
Intelligent function module parameter can be set as well.
Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU

Created sequence programs can be written to/read from a programmable
controller CPU using the Read from PLC/Write to PLC function. Also, with
the Online program change function, the sequence programs can be
changed even when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
Reading data
Writing data
2-1
Monitoring/debugging
Created sequence programs can be written to the programmable controller
CPU and device values at operation can be monitored online/offline.
Programs can be monitored and debugged.
Diagnostics
The current error status and error history of the programmable controller
CPU can be diagnosed.
With the diagnostics function, the recovery work is completed in a short
time.
With the System monitor function (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU), detailed
information on such as intelligent function modules can be obtained. This
helps to shorten the recovery work time at error occurrence.
Diagnosing the programmable controller

CPU status (PLC diagnostics screen)
Diagnosing the
CPU status
2-2
2.1 Features of GX Works2
This section explains the features of GX Works2.
(1) Project types in GX Works2

In GX Works2, the project type can be selected from either of Simple project or
Structured project.
(a) Simple project

The Simple project creates sequence programs using instructions for
Mitsubishi programmable controller CPU.
Programs in a Simple project can be created in a similar way to existing GX
Developer.
(b) Structured project

In a Structured project, programs can be created by structured
programming.
By segmenting a whole control process program into common program
parts, highly manageable and usable programming (structured
programming) is possible.
POU Program file
Function block 1 Program block A Program MAIN
Program block B
Function block 2
Program block C Program SUB1
Function 1 Program block D
Function 2 Program block E
Sequence programs are created

by combining POU (Program
Organization Unit) s.
2-3
(2) Enhanced use of program assets
Projects created with existing GX Developer can be utilized in a Simple project.
Utilizing the past assets improves the efficiency of program design.
<GX Developer> <GX Works2>
Project created
with GX Developer
Can be used in
GX Works2.
(3) Sharing Program Organization Unit (POU) registered as libraries

In a Structured project, programs, global labels, and structures frequently used
can be registered as user libraries. Utilizing these user libraries reduces time
required for creating programs.
Project A
Project B
Project C
Project D
Library file
2-4
(4) Wide variety of programming languages
The wide variety of programming languages available with GX Works2 enables
to select the optimum programming language according to control.
<Ladder> <SFC>
Programming similar to existing GX Developer Programming to clarify the procedure
<Structured ladder> <ST>

Programming a ladder program graphically Programming in a text language similar to
C language
(5) Other features
(a) Offline debugging

Offline debugging using the simulation function is possible with GX Works2.
This enables debugging to ensure the normal operation of created
sequence programs without connecting GX Works2 to the programmable
controller CPU.
Simulation function
Without connecting the programmable controller CPU, programs can be

Connecting the programmable monitored and debugged in the same way with debugging by the
controller CPU is unnecessary. programmable controller CPU.
2-5
(b) The screen layout can be customized to the user's preference
The docking windows enable to change the screen layout of GX Works2
without restriction.
Screen layout can be

changed without restriction.
2-6
2.1.1 MELSOFT iQ Works
MELSOFT iQ Works integrates the engineering software (GX Works2, MT

Developer2, and GT Designer3).
Sharing the design information such as the system design and programming in the
whole control system improves the efficiency of program design and efficiency of
programming, which reduces costs.
MELSOFT iQ Works
GX Works2 MT Developert2
GT Designer3
(Programmable controller (Motion controller
(GOT drawing software)
programming software) programming software)
MELSOFT Navigator
(System configuration management tool)
Sharing the design information

between the software
Design information
data base
POINT
To start MELSOFT Navigator and each engineering software, click the Start button and follow
the procedure below.
• MELSOFT Navigator: [MELSOFT Application] → [MELSOFT iQ Works] → [MELSOFT
Navigator]
• GX Works2: [MELSOFT Application] → [GX Works2] → [GX Works2]
• MT Developer2: [MELSOFT Application] → [MT Works2] → [MT Developer2]
• GT Designer3: [MELSOFT Application] → [GT Works3] → [GT Designer3]
2-7
[Purpose of the engineering environment]
ERP
(Enterprise Resource Planning)
MES
(Manufacturing Execution System)
Engineering environment
Controller and HMI Network
1) Integrating development environment which was

independent of each device
2) Sharing the design information in whole development phases
(system designing, programming, test/startup, and operation/maintenance)
POINT
is a FA integrated concept of MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC.
Integrated Q/improved Quality/intelligent&Quick/innovation&Quest
2-8
2.2 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Works2
2.2.1 Screen configuration in GX Works2
1) Title bar
2) Menu bar
3) Toolbar
4) Tab
7) Edit screen (work window)

5) View contents display area
6) View selection area

8) Output window
9) Status bar
2-9
1) Title bar
Title bar displays the name of the active project.
Resizes or terminates GX Works2. Maximizes or restores GX Works2.
Displays the name and Minimizes GX Works2. Terminates

the path of the project. GX Works2.
2) Menu bar
Menu bar is the most frequently used item when operating GX Works2.
Click the menu bar to select a variety of functions from the drop-down menu.
3) Toolbar
Toolbar equips buttons to easily access the commonly-used functions.
This enables a quicker operation.
Point the cursor to the tool button

to show the function of each button.
4) Tab
When multiple work windows are open, they are displayed in the tab browser
format. Clicking a tab activates the corresponding work window.
5) View contents display area

View contents display area displays the contents of the currently selected view.
6) View selection area

View selection area allows selection of the view to be displayed.
7) Edit screen (work window)

Edit screen displays various screens such as ladder program creation screen
and comment creation screen for editing ladder diagrams, comments, and
parameters.
8) Output window
Output window displays compilation and check results (such as errors and
warnings).
9) Status bar
Status bar displays the status information of GX Works2.
Displays the
state of Caps Lock.
Displays the current mode.
Displays the Displays the Displays the current Displays the

CPU type. connected CPU. cursor position. state of Num Lock.
2 - 10
2.2.2 Ladder editor
This section explains the screen display of the GX Works2 ladder editor and its
basic operations.
(1) Edit screen
(2) Changing the display size of the edit screen

The display size of the edit screen can be changed.
1) Click [View] → [Zoom].
The Zoom dialog box is displayed.
Change the display size according to the

selected zoom ratio.
Change the display size according to the

specified zoom ratio. (available range: 50 to 150%)
Adjust the width of the ladder automatically to

display the entire ladder.
2 - 11
(3) Changing the text size on the edit screen
The text size displayed on the edit screen can be changed.
1) Select [View] → [Text Size] →
[Bigger]/[Smaller].
The text size is changed one step at each

setting within the range of 10 steps.
(4) Displaying/hiding comments

Device comments (label comments), notes, and statements can be displayed
and hidden.
1) Select [View] → [Comment]/[Statement]/[Note].
POINT
Displaying/hiding comments
Comments also can be displayed or hidden by the following operation.
[Tool] → [Option] → "Program Editor" → "Ladder" → "Comment"
* The details of this operation are explained in the next page.
2 - 12
(5) Setting the number of rows and columns for displaying comments
The option setting allows switching the number of rows and columns for
displaying a device comment.
1) Click [Tool] → [Option].
The Options screen is displayed.
2) Click "Program Editor" → "Ladder" → "Comment".
The screen for setting Device Comment Display

Format is displayed.
Comments can be displayed or hidden by

this setting in addition to by the method
described on the previous page.
(To the next page)
2 - 13
(From the previous page)
Set the number of display

Set the number of display columns to 5 or 8.
rows in the range from 1 to 4.
Example)
4 rows × 8 columns 2 rows × 5 columns
2 - 14
(6) Setting the number of contacts to be displayed in ladder programs
The option setting allows switching the number of contacts to be displayed in a
single row.
1) Click "Program Editor" → "Ladder" → "Ladder
Diagram" in the Options screen.
The screen for setting Display Format for the

ladder diagram is displayed.
Set the number of contacts to be displayed in

a single row to 9 or 11 contacts.
2 - 15
(7) Switching the label name display and device display
The display of a program that uses labels can be switched between the label
name display and device display.
If label comments or device comments are set, the corresponding comments
are displayed.
Devices assigned by the compilation can be checked by switching the program
display from the label name display to the device display.
1) Click [View] → [Device Display].
The screen for setting Display Format for the

ladder diagram is displayed.
Example)
Label name display Device display
POINT
Displaying/hiding label comments and device comments
To check the set label comments and device comments, set the setting to display
comments. (Refer to section 2.2.2 (4))
2 - 16
(8) Hiding a ladder block
The ladder block after the ladder conversion can be hidden.
The ladder block in which the statements are set is hidden with the statements
displayed.
(a) Hiding a ladder block
1) Move the cursor to the ladder block to be

hidden.
1) Move the cursor!
2) Click [View] → [Non-Display Ladder Block].
(To the next page)
2 - 17
3) The selected ladder blocks are hidden.
The ladder block is hidden.
(b) Canceling the hidden ladder block.
1) Move the cursor to the hidden ladder block

displayed in gray.
1) Move the cursor!
2) Click [View] → [Display Ladder Block].
(To the next page)
2 - 18
3) The hidden ladder blocks are displayed.
The hidden ladder blocks are displayed.
POINT
Displaying/hiding ladder blocks
• Multiple ladder blocks also can be displayed and hidden.
• All ladder blocks can be displayed and hidden by the operation of [View] →
[Display All Ladder Block]/[Non-Display All Ladder Block].
• Ladder blocks also can be displayed and hidden by Right-click →
[Displaying/hiding ladder blocks].
2 - 19
2.2.3 Project
This section explains the configurations of a project that is displayed in a tree format
in the Project view. The display contents differ according to the programmable
controller type and the project type. The following is an example for a Simple project
of QCPU (Q mode).
< Simple project (without labels) >

Set various parameters.
Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
Set global device comments.
Set an execution type of each program.
Create programs.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Simple Project
Set local device comments.

Make settings for device memory.
Set device initial values.
< Simple project (with labels) >

Set various parameters.
Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
Set global device comments.
Set global labels.
Set an execution type of each program.
Create programs.
Set local device comments.

Make settings for device memory.
Set device initial values.
2 - 20
1) One project per GX Works2
One GX Works2 can edit only one project unit.
To edit two or more projects at a time, run as many GX Works2 as the
number of projects.
2) Device comments
Device comment of GX Works2 is categorized into global device
comment and local device comment.
Comment type Number of comments Description

A device comment created automatically
when a new project is created.
Global comment 1 Global comments are set to use common
device comment data among multiple
programs.
A device comment created by the user.
No local device comment exists when a
Equals the number of new project is created. Therefore, create a
Local comment
the programs. local device comment if necessary.
Set the same names as sequence
programs.
2 - 21
2.3 Operation Before Creating Ladder Program
2.3.1 Starting up GX Works2
1) Click the button.
2) Select [All Programs].
3) Select [MELSOFT Application].
4) Select [GX Works2].
Put the mouse cursor over the items to select

3) Select! the menu.
5) Click!
(Clicking or double-clicking the mouse is not
2) Select! required.)
4) Select! 5) Click [GX Works2].
1) Click!
6) GX Works2 starts up.
6) GX Works2 starts up.
2 - 22
2.3.2 Creating a new project
1) Click!
1) Click on the toolbar or select [Project] →
[New Project] ( Ctrl + N ).
2) Click the "Project Type" list button.

2) Select!
3) The "Project Type" list is displayed. Select
"Simple Project".
3) Click and select!
4) Click the "PLC Series" list button.
5) The "PLC Series" list is displayed. Select

"QCPU (Q mode)".
4) Click!
(To the next page)
2 - 23
6) Click the "PLC Type" list button.
7) The "PLC Type" list is displayed. Select

"Q06UDH".
8) Click!
8) Click the OK button.

6) Click!
9) A new project is opened.
9) A new project is opened!
2 - 24
2.4 Preparation for Starting Up CPU
Setting switches and formatting the built-in memory are required before writing a
program to the CPU.
Connect or set the connectors and the switches of (1) to (3) shown below.
(The figures below are example of Q06UDHCPU.)
Q06UDHCPU
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1) Connecting a battery

Connect the battery since the lead wire of the battery connector is disconnected
at the factory shipment.
(2) Setting the switches

Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the STOP position.
(3) Connecting the USB cable
2 - 25
(4) Setting the connection destination
This section explains how to set the connection destination for accessing the
1) Click "Connection Destination" in the view

selection area on the navigation window.
1) Click!
2) The Connection Destination view is

displayed. Double-click "Connection1" in
Current Connection.
2) Double-click!
The Transfer Setup dialog box is displayed.
3) Double-click "Serial USB" of PC side I/F.
3) Double-click!
4) The PC side I/F Serial Setting dialog box is

displayed. Check "USB" and click the OK
button.
4) Click!
5) Double-click "PLC Module" of PLC side I/F.

5) Double-click!
(To the next page)
2 - 26
6) The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of PLC

Module dialog box is displayed. Select
"QCPU (Q mode) " and click the OK
6) Click!
button.
7) Click!
2 - 27
(5) Formatting the built-in memory of the CPU
This section explains how to format the program memory of the QCPU.
1) Click [Online] → [PLC Memory Operation] →

[Format PLC Memory].
1) Click!
2) The Format PLC Memory dialog box is

displayed. Select "Program Memory" from the
Target Memory drop-down menu.
2) Select the target memory.
3) Click the Execute button.
3) Click!
4) Click the Yes button to start formatting.
4) Click!
5) When format is completed, the dialog box on

the left is displayed. Click the OK button.
5) Click!
6) Click the Close button to close the dialog

box.
6) Click!
2 - 28
(6) Clearing all the device memory from the CPU
This section explains how to clear the device memory of the QCPU.
1) Click [Online] → [PLC Memory Operation] →
[Clear PLC Memory].
1) Click!
2) The Clear PLC Memory dialog box is

displayed. Check that "Clear Device's whole
Memory" is checked.
2) Check.
3) Check "Include Latch".
3) Check.
4) Click!
5) Click the Yes button to clear the latch

device.
5) Click!
6) When the clearing the latch device is

completed, the dialog box on the left is
displayed. Click the OK button.
6) Click!

box.
7) Click!
2 - 29
(7) Clearing the error history in the CPU
This section explains how to clear the error history data stored in the QCPU.
1) Click [Diagnostics] → [PLC Diagnostics].
1) Click!
2) The PLC Diagnostics dialog box is displayed.

Click the Clear History button.
3) The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click the Yes button.

2) Click!
box.
4) Click!
2 - 30
(8) Setting the clock on the programmable controller CPU
Setting a year, month, date, time, minute, second, and day of the week to the
clock on the programmable controller CPU is available.
To use the clock function, use GX Works2 or a sequence program.
Set or read the clock data in GX Works2.
1) Click [Online] → [Set Clock] to display the Set

Clock dialog box.
1) Click!
2) Enter a year, month, date, time, minute,

second, and day of the week in the Set Clock
dialog box.
2) Enter time!
3) Click!
2 - 31
2.5 Creating Ladder Program
2.5.1 Creating a ladder program using the function keys
A ladder program to be created Follow the steps below to create the ladder program
as shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y71
1) Press the F5 key to open the Enter Symbol

window. Enter "X2".
If any other key is pressed by mistake, press the
2) Press "Enter"!
Esc key and retype.
1) Enter "X2"!
2) Press the Enter key to confirm the entry.
• The OK or Exit button also can be used to confirm

or cancel the entry.
X2
3) The symbol is displayed! 3) The entered symbol ( ) is displayed.
4) Press the Shift + F5 keys , and enter "X0".

5) Press "Enter"!
4) Enter "X0"!
X0
7) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y70".

8) Press "Enter"!
7) Enter "Y70"!
(To the next page)
2 - 32
9) The symbol is displayed! 9) The entered symbol ( Y70 ) is displayed.
10) Press the F6 key, and enter "Y70".

11) Press "Enter"!
10) Enter "Y70"!
Y70
13) Move the cursor! Y70

13) Move the cursor to the symbol under .
15) Press "Enter"!

14) Press the F5 key, and enter "X3".
14) Enter "X3"!
X3
16) The entered symbol ( ) is displayed.
16) The symbol is displayed!
18) Press "Enter"! 17) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y71".
17) Enter "Y71"!
19) The entered symbol ( Y71 ) is displayed.
20) The procedure is finished.
2 - 33
2.5.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons
A ladder program to be created Follow the steps below to create the ladder program
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y71
1) Click on the toolbar to open the Enter Symbol

window. Enter "X2".
If any other button is pressed by mistake, click the
1) Click , 2) Click! Exit button.
then enter "X2".
2) Click the OK button to confirm the entry.
X2
4) Click on the toolbar, and enter "X0".

4) Click , 5) Click!
then enter "X0". 5) Click the OK button.
X0
7) Click on the toolbar, and enter "Y70".
(To the next page)
2 - 34

11) Click!
10) Click ,
then enter "X0".
Y70
12) The symbol is displayed! Y70

13) Move the cursor to the symbol under .
13) Move the cursor!
14) Click on the toolbar, and enter "X3".

X3


17) Click , then enter "Y71"! 18) Click!
20) The procedure is finished.
2 - 35
2.6 Converting Program (Ladder Conversion)
1) Click [Compile] → [Build] ( F4 ).
1) Click!
2) The ladder program has been converted.
If an error occurs during a conversion, the cursor

will automatically move to the defective point of
the ladder program. Check the point and correct
the program as necessary.
2 - 36
2.7 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
(1) Writing data to the CPU
1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence

program) has been created with GX Works2
to proceed to the next step.
2) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch on the

CPU to STOP.
2) Set the switch to "STOP"!
3) Click on the toolbar or click [Online]

→ [Write to PLC].
3) Click!
4) From the "PLC Module" tab, click to select

4) Select a program to be the program and parameter to write to the
written by clicking on data!
CPU. Or click Parameter + Program to
select the target program and parameter.
5) Click Execute to accept the selection.
5) Click!
6) If a parameter or program has already been

written, the confirmation dialog box for
overwriting the data is displayed. Click
Yes .
6) Click!
(To the next page)
2 - 37
7) The progress dialog box is displayed.
8) The message "Completed" is displayed when

the writing is completed. Click Close .
8) Click!

box.
9) Click!
2 - 38
(2) Reading data from the CPU
1) Click on the toolbar or click [Online]

→ [Read from PLC].
1) Click!
2) From the "PLC Module" tab, click to select the

2) Select a program to be program and parameter to read from the CPU. Or
read by clicking on data! 2) Select the
target memory! click Parameter + Program to select the target
program and parameter.
Select "Program Memory/Device Memory" for

"Target Memory".
3) Click Execute to accept the selection.
3) Click!
4) If a parameter or program exits, the confirmation

dialog box for overwriting the data is displayed.
Click Yes .
4) Click!
5) The progress dialog box is displayed.
6) The message "Completed" is displayed when the

reading is completed. Click Close .
6) Click!
2 - 39
2.8 Monitoring Ladder Program Status
1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence

program) has been written into the
programmable controller CPU to proceed to
the next step.
2) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch on the

2) Set the switch to "RUN"! CPU to RESET once (for about one sec.),
return it to STOP, then set it to RUN.
3) Click on the toolbar or click [Online] →

[Monitor] →[Start Monitoring].
3) Click!
4) Selecting another menu ends the monitor

mode.
Operation Practice
1) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 lights up by turning on the snap switch X2,
and that the indicator remains lit after the snap switch is turned off.
2) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 turns off by pressing (turning on) the push
button (snap switch) X0, and that the indicator does not light up when the button
(snap switch) is released (turned off).
3) Turning on the snap switch X3 turns on the LED indicator Y71.
2 - 40
(1) In the monitor mode, the Monitor Status dialog box shown below is displayed
regardless of the monitor status.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
1) Connection status
Displays the connection status between a programmable controller
CPU and personal computer in which the simulation function is started.
2) RUN/STOP status
Displays the programmable controller CPU status operated by the key
switch on the programmable controller CPU or the remote operation
from GX Works2.
3) ERR. status (PLC diagnostics)

Displays the error status of the programmable controller CPU.
Clicking the icon displays the PLC Diagnostics screen (*1).
4) USER status (PLC diagnostics)

Displays the user error status of the programmable controller CPU.
Clicking the icon displays the PLC Diagnostics screen (*1).
5) Scan time
Displays the maximum scan time of the monitored programmable
controller CPU.
The Q-series programmable controller displays the scan time in units
of 0.1msec.
*1: For the PLC diagnostics, refer to section 2.8.
(2) The statuses of the ladder are indicated as shown below.
1) Display of a contact when X0 = OFF

X0 X0
Normally open contact Normally closed contact

(not conducting) (conducting)
Display of a contact when X0 = ON

X0 X0
Normally open contact Normally closed contact

(conducting) (not conducting)
2) Display of a coil output instruction, contact-equivalent comparison

instruction, and coil-equivalent instruction
Not executed, *
conditions not established
Executed, *
conditions established
*: Available contact-equivalent comparison and coil-equivalent

instructions are SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, MC, FF, DELTA,
and DELTAP.
2 - 41
(3) Ladder conversion during the monitoring
This section explains the procedure to convert Y70 into Y72 during the
monitoring.
1) Double-click ( Y70 ).
1) Double-click!
2) The Enter Symbol window is displayed. Enter

"Y72".
2) Enter "Y72"! 3) Press the Enter key.
Y70
4) Double-click ( ) and change "Y70" to "Y72".
4) Enter "Y72"!
5) Click [Compile] → [Build] ( F4 ).

5) Click!
6) The conversion is completed.
2 - 42
2.9 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
1) Click!
2) The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed.

2)
1)
3)
5)
4)
7)
6)
2 - 43
Item Description
1) Monitor Status Displays the current monitor status.
Connection Channel
2) Displays the connection route which has been set.
List
For single CPU system
Displays the operation status and switch status of the programmable controller CPU.
3) CPU operation status For multiple CPU system
Displays the operaton status and the switch status of CPU No. 1 to No. 4.
• "Uninstallable/Blank" is displayed for a slot with no module mounted.
Image of
4) programmable Perform online operations of the programmable controller CPU. (refer to POINT)
controller CPU
Error Information Select this to display the current error information of the programmable controller CPU.
Select this to display the status information of the programmable controller CPU.
5) PLC Status
Information
6) Error History Displays the latest error history by clicking the button.
7) Status Icon Legend Displays the status icons on the screen.
POINT
Online operations
The PLC Memory Operation function and the Remote Operation function can be executed from the
image of the programmable controller CPU.
When the cursor is moved to the image of the programmable controller CPU, the function menu is
expanded. Click the image of the programmable controller CPU to display the items to be set.
<Set Clock/Write Title>
<Remote Operation>
<PLC Memory Operation>
2 - 44
2.10 Editing Ladder Program
2.10.1 Modifying a part of the ladder program
A ladder program to be created This section explains how to modify a part of the
ladder program shown on the left.
X2 X0
(OUT Y71 → OUT Y72)
Y70
Y70
Y72
X3
Y71
1) Confirm that "Ovrwrte" is shown at the

lower-right portion of the screen.
1) Check!
If "Insert" is shown on the screen, click the Ins key
to change the display to "Ovrwrte".
If "Insert" is shown on the screen, contacts or coils are
added to the diagram.
<When correcting X2 to X5>
Added!
X5 X2
<When correcting SET to RST>
SET M3
RST M3
Added!
2) Double-click the point to be corrected.
2) Double-click!
(To the next page)
2 - 45
3) The Enter Symbol window is displayed.
3) The Enter Symbol window is displayed!
4) Click the edit box and enter "Y72".
5) Click the OK button to accept the change.

5) Click!
4) Enter "Y72"!
6) The modified diagram is displayed! 6) The modified ladder program is displayed.
7) To convert the edited ladder program, click

[Compile] → [Build] ( F4 ).
2 - 46
2.10.2 Drawing/deleting lines
(1) Drawing lines
A ladder program to be created This section explains how to add a line to the
ladder program shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Y73
X3
Y72
1) Click ( Alt + F10 ) on the toolbar.
1) Click!
2) Drag! 2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the

end position.
A vertical line is created to the left of the cursor.
3) A line is created when the left button of the

mouse is released.
3) A line is created!
(To the next page)
2 - 47
then enter "Y73"!

2 - 48
(2) Deleting lines
A ladder program to be created Perform the following steps to delete the line
from the ladder shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Y73
X3
Y72
1) Click ( Alt + F9 ) on the toolbar.
1) Click!
2) Drag! 2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the

end position.
3) The line is deleted when the left button of the

mouse is released.
The line drawn for the END instruction cannot be

removed.
3) The line is deleted!
4) Press the Delete key to delete Y73 .
4) Press "Delete"!
2 - 49
2.10.3 Inserting/deleting rows
(1) Inserting rows
A ladder program to be modified This section explains how to add a row to the
X7 ladder program shown on the left.
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y72
1) Click on any point of the row to move the

cursor.
1) Click to move the cursor!
A new row is inserted above the row selected with the

cursor.
2) Right-click on any point on the ladder

program creation screen to display the
menu.
2) The menu
is displayed!
(To the next page)
2 - 50
3) Select the [Edit] → [Insert Row]

( Shift + Ins ).
3) Click!
4) A new row is inserted above the selected

row.
4) A new row is inserted!
5) Click on the toolbar to open the Enter

Symbol window. Enter "X7".
6) Click the OK button to accept the entry.
then enter "X7"!
(To the next page)
2 - 51
X7

8) Click , 9) Click the OK button.

9) Click!
then enter "Y77"!
10) The symbol is displayed! 10) The entered symbol ( Y77 ) is

displayed.

2 - 52
(2) Deleting rows
A ladder program to be modified This section explains how to delete the row
X7 from the ladder program shown on the left.
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y72
1) Click on any point of the row to be deleted to

move the cursor.
2) Right-click on any point on the ladder

program creation screen to display the
menu.
2) The menu
is displayed!
(To the next page)
2 - 53
3) Select the [Edit] → [Delete Row]

( Shift + Del ).
3) Click!
4) The selected row is deleted.
4) The row is deleted! 5) To convert the edited ladder program, click

2 - 54
2.10.4 Cutting/copying ladder program
A ladder program to be modified This section explains how to copy and cut the
X7 ladder program shown on the left.
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Range of cut or copy

1) Click on the start point of the ladder program
to be cut to move the cursor.
2) Drag the mouse over the ladder to specify the

area.
2) Drag to specify the area!
The selected area is highlighted.
Click the step numbers and drag the mouse vertically

to specify the area in ladder block units.
3) Click on the toolbar or select [Edit] →

3) Click to cut! [Cut] ( Ctrl + X ) to cut the specified
area.
(To the next page)
2 - 55
4) Click on the start point of the ladder program

to be copied to move the cursor.
5) Drag the mouse over the ladder to specify

the area.
The selected area is highlighted.
Click the step numbers and drag the mouse vertically

to specify the area in ladder block units.

[Copy] ( Ctrl + C ) to copy the specified
6) Click ! area.
7) Click any ladder block to move the cursor to

the ladder. The copied ladder is pasted
above the row with the cursor.
The ladder is pasted above this block!
(To the next page)
2 - 56

[Paste] ( Ctrl + V ) to paste the cut or
copied area.
8) Click!
9) The cut or copied ladder is pasted.
9) Completed!
2 - 57
2.11 Verifying Data
This section explains how to verify the open project against the data on the
The verification function is used to compare the contents of two projects or to locate
program changes made in the programs.
1) Click [Online] → [Verify with PLC].
1) Click!
2) The Online Data Operation dialog box is displayed.

Click the Parameter + Program button.
2) Click! 3) Click the Execute button.
3) Click!
4) The verification result is displayed in the Verify

Result window.
To check the detail of the data, double-click the

4) Double-click!
corresponding row.
5) The detail of the result is displayed.
5) Display!
2 - 58
2.12 Saving Ladder Program
2.12.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects
1) Click on the toolbar or select [Project]

→ [Save] ( Ctrl + S ).
Saving the existing project is completed at this

1) Click!
step.
(Only when a newly-created project is saved)

2) Specify the location to store the project.
3) Set a workspace name.
4) Set a project name.

2) Specify the location to
store the project!
5) Set a title as necessary.
4) Set a project name!
6) Click the Save button to accept the entry.
3) Set a workspace name!
5) Set a title as necessary!
6) Click!
7) Click the Yes button.

The new project is saved.
7) Click!
2 - 59
POINT
• Workspace
Workspace enables GX Works2 to manage several projects with one name.
• When the save destination exists
When the save destination (workspace and project) exists, the folder where the workspace is saved
can be specified in "Workspace/Project List".
• Number of the characters for a workspace name, project name, and title
Specify a workspace name, project name, and title within 128 characters each.
However, the total number of the characters of the save destination path name + workspace name
+ project name must be within 150.
2.12.2 Saving a project with another name
1) Click [Project] → [Save as].
1) Click!
2) Specify the location to store the project.
3) Set a workspace name.
2) Specify the location to 4) Set a project name.

store the project!
5) Set a title as necessary.
4) Set a project name!
3) Set a workspace name! 6) Click the Save button to accept the entry.
5) Set a title as necessary!
6) Click!
7) Click the Yes button.

7) Click! The new project is saved.
2 - 60
2.13 Reading the saved project
1) Click on the toolbar or select [Project]

→ [Open] ( Ctrl + O ).
1) Click!
2) Specify the location where the project to be

read is stored.
3) Double-click!
3) Double-click the workspace to be read.
4) Click the project to be read.
4) Click! 5) Click the button to start reading the specified

project.
5) Click!
Each confirmation dialog box below is displayed in the following cases;

(When another project has been open)
Yes ·········Terminates the project.
No ··········Keeps the project open.
(When another project has been open without being converted)
Yes ·········Terminates the project without

converting the project.
No ··········Keeps the project open.
(Continue editing the ladder program.)
(When another project has been open without being saved)
Yes ·········Terminates the project after saving it.

No ··········Terminates the project without
saving it.
Cancel ····Keeps the project open.
2 - 61
2.14 Opening Projects in Different Format
This section explains how to open a project created with GX Developer in

GX Works2.
1) Click [Project] → [Open Other Data]

→ [Open Other Project].
2) The Open Other Project dialog box is

displayed. Specify the project and click the
Open button.
2) Click!
3) The message on the left is displayed.

4) The project created with GX Developer is

read.
2 - 62
POINT
• Status after a project in a different format are opened
When a project in a different format is opened, the project is in the uncompiled status.
Compile all programs in the project before executing online operations such as writing data and
monitoring.
When a compile error occurs, correct the corresponding program according to the programming
manual.
2.15 Saving Projects in Different Format

This section explains how to save a Simple project of GX Works2 in the GX
Developer format.
1) Click [Project] → [Export to GX Developer

Format File].
1) Click!
2) The Export to GX Developer Format File

dialog box is displayed. Specify the
2) Select! destination to save the project.
3) Enter a project name and click the Save

button.
3) Click!
4) The message on the left is displayed. Click

the Yes button.
5) The project is saved in the GX Developer

format.
2 - 63
MEMO
2 - 64
CHAPTER 3 DEVICE AND PARAMETER OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
3.1 Device
A device is an imaginary element for programming in the programmable controller

CPU, as well as the components (such as contacts and coils) that compose a
program.
X6 T2 Y 74
Y74
Y74 Device No.
Device symbol
Type Description Remark

Sends commands and data to a programmable controller
X Input through external devices such as push buttons, selector
switches, limit switches, and digital switches.
Outputs control results to solenoids, electromagnetic switches,
Y Output
signal lights, and digital indicators.
Auxiliary relay inside a programmable controller that cannot
M Internal relay
output directly to external devices
Uninterruptible auxiliary relay inside the programmable
L Latch relay
controller that cannot output directly to external devices
Internal relay for data link that cannot output directly to external
B Link relay devices The area not assigned by initial link information setting
can be used as an internal relay.
• Bit device
Used for failure detection. Create a failure detection program
• Mainly handles on/off
beforehand and turn on the program while the programmable
F Annunciator signals.
controller is running to store numerical values in the special
register D.
Internal relay that stores an operation result (on/off information)
V Edge relay
from the top of a circuit block
SM Special relay Internal relay that stores CPU statuses
Internal relay for data link that indicates a communication
SB Special link relay
status and errors
Internal relay that captures the on/off data specified by a
FX Function input subroutine call instructions with arguments in a subroutine
program
Internal relay that passes an operation result (on/off data) in a
FY Function output
subroutine program to a subroutine program call source
Accumulative timers of four types: low-speed timer, high-speed
T(ST) Timer
timer, low-speed integrator, and high-speed integrator
Accumulative counters of two types: counters for sequence
C Counter
programs and counters for interruption sequence programs
D Data register Memory that stores data in the programmable controller • Word device
W Link register Data register for data link • Mainly handles data.
Register for an extensive use of data registers, which uses the • One word consists of
R File register
standard RAM or memory card 16 bits.
SD Special register Register that stores CPU statuses • Can be specified by
Data register for data link that stores a communication status entering ~.* (* = 0 to F
SW Link data register (hexadecimal)).
and failure information
Register for the exchange data between a subroutine call
FD Function register
source and a subroutine program
Register for modification to the devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C,
Z Index register
D, W, R, K, H, and P)
3-1
Type Description Remark
Function Register for the exchange data between a subroutine call
FD
register source and a subroutine program
Register for modification to the devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C,
Z Index register
D, W, R, K, H, and P)
N Nesting Shows the nesting (nested structure) of the master control.
Locates the jump addresses of the branch instructions (CJ,
P Pointer
SCJ, CALL and JMP).
Interruption Locates a jump address that corresponds to the factor of the
I
pointer interruption when an interruption occurs.
Network No.
Used to specify the network number in the data link
J specification
instructions.
device
I/O No.
Used to specify the I/O number in the intelligent function
U specification
module dedicated instructions.
device
Used to specify the following; timer counter set value, pointer
Decimal
K number, interruption pointer number, number of digits of bit
constant
device, and basic/application instruction values.
Hexadecimal
H Used to specify the basic/application instruction values.
constant
E Real number
Used to specify real numbers as instructions.
constant
"Character Character string
Used to specify character strings as instructions.
String" constant
Jn\X • Bit device
Jn\Y • Mainly handles on/off
Jn\B Link direct Device that can access directly to a link device of a network signals.
Jn\SB device module (The refresh parameter setting is not required.)
Jn\W • Word device
Jn\SW • Mainly handles data.
Intelligent • One word consists of
Device that can access directly to the buffer memory of a
Un\G function module 16 bits.
intelligent function module
device
3-2
3.2 Parameter
The parameters are basic setting values applied to a programmable controller in

order to control objects as planned.
The parameters are divided into the PLC parameter, network parameter, and remote
password as shown below.
* A shaded area in the following table indicates the items to be set in this textbook.
Item Description
Label Sets a label (name and application) of a programmable controller CPU.
PLC name
Comment Sets a comment for the label of a programmable controller CPU.
Timer limit setting Sets the time limit of the low-speed or high-speed timer.
RUN-PAUSE contacts Sets contacts for controlling RUN and PAUSE of a programmable controller CPU.
Latch data backup operation Sets contact devices in order to execute the latch data backup operation.
valid contact (Only for Universal model QCPU)
Remote reset Sets whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.
Output mode at STOP to Sets the status of an output (Y) when the programmable controller is switched from STOP
RUN to RUN.
Floating point arithmetic Sets whether to execute floating-point processing in double precision.
processing (Only for high performance model QCPU)
Intelligent function module • Sets the interruption pointer assignment of a module.
setting • Sets the start I/O number and start SI number.
Common pointer No. Sets the start number of the pointer used as a common pointer.
PLC system Points occupied by empty
Sets the number of empty slots for the main or extension base unit.
slot
• Sets the start number of the interrupt counters.
System interrupt settings
• Sets the execution interval for the interrupt pointers.
Interrupt program/fixed scan
Set whether to execute high-speed execution of an interrupt program.
program setting
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable controller CPU with that of the
Module synchronization
intelligent function module.
PLC parameter
A-PLC compatibility setting Set whether to use the MELSEC-A series special relays/special registers.
Sets the processing time and the number of times of service processing. (Only for Universal
Service processing setting
model QCPU)
Set this parameter to replace the CPU module using a memory card (Only for Universal
PLC module change setting
model QCPU).
• Sets the file register file to be used in a program.
File register • Sets whether to transfer data to the standard ROM at a latch data backup operation.
(Only for Universal model QCPU)
Comment file used in a
Sets the device comment file to be used in a program.
command
PLC file
Initial device value Sets the device initial value file to be used on the programmable controller CPU.
File for local device Sets the local device file to be used in a program.
File used for
Sets the device data ROM write/read instruction file to be used in a program.
SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD
(Only for Universal model QCPU)
instruction
WDT (watchdog timer)
Sets the WDT of the programmable controller CPU.
setting
Error check Sets whether to detect specified errors.
Operation mode when there
Sets the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error is detected.
is an error
PLC RAS
Constant scanning Sets the constant scan time.
Sets the storage destination for error histories of the programmable controller CPU. (Only
Breakdown history
for high performance model QCPU)
Low speed program Sets the execution time of a low-speed program in every scan. (Only for high performance
execution time model QCPU)
3-3
Item Description
Boot option Sets whether to clear the program memory when booting up.
Boot file Sets the type, data name, transfer source drive, and transfer destination drive of the boot
Boot file setting
file.
Sets the file name and execution type (execution condition) of the program when several
Program
programs are written to the programmable controller CPU
Sets the startup mode and startup condition of an SFC program and the output mode at
SFC
block stop
Device points Sets the number of points used for each device of the programmable controller CPU.
Sets the latch range (start device number/end device number) clearable with the
Latch (1) start/end
RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear operation.
Sets the latch range (start device number/end device number) not clearable with the
Latch (2) start/east
RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear operation.
Device
Local device start/end Sets the range (start device number/end device number) of devices used as a local device.
File register extended Sets the extended data register and extended link register. (Only for Universal model
setting QCPU)
Indexing setting for ZR Sets the start number of Z to be 32-bit indexed, or use the index register ZZ for 32-bit index
device setting. (Only for Universal model QCPU)
Sets the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O number of each module
I/O assignment
mounted on the base unit.
I/O assignment
Sets the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of the power supply
PLC parameter
Basic setting
module, and the model of the extension cable.
No. of PLC Sets the number of programmable controller CPUs used in the multiple CPU system.
Sets the operation mode of the multiple CPU system when a stop error occurs in any of the
Operation mode
programmable controller CPU No. 2 to No. 4.
Host station Sets the CPU number for the host CPU.
Multiple CPU synchronous
Selects the CPU modules to be started up synchronously.
startup setting
Multiple CPU
Online module change Sets whether to allow the online module change in the multiple CPU system.
setting
I/O sharing when using Sets whether to retrieve the I/O status of the I/O module or intelligent function module
multiple CPUs controlled by other programmable controller CPUs.
Communication area setting
Sets the CPU shared memory to enable data sharing among multiple CPUs.
(refresh setting)
Multiple CPU high speed
Sets the user setting area, auto refresh, assignment confirmation, and system area.
transmission area setting
IP address setting Sets the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Built-in Communication data code Selects the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
Ethernet port Open setting button Sets the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
setting FTP setting button Selects whether to use the FTP function
Time setting button Sets whether to use the SNTP function and the timing of setting the time.
Transmission speed Sets the transmission speed.
Serial Sum check Sets the sum check.
communication Transmission wait time Sets the transmission wait time.
Online change Sets whether to allow the online program change.
Sets the network parameters for Ehternet, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H, and CC-Link
parameter
Network
Ehternet/CC IE/MELSECNET
IE controller network.
CC-Link Sets the parameters for CC-Link.
Remote password Sets the password that limits the access via the Ethernet or serial communication modules.
3-4
• When GX Works2 starts, it employs the preset values as the parameters. These
values are called the default (initial values).
• The programmable controller can run with those values unchanged, however,
modify them within a specified range as necessary.
Operation example: Changing the operation mode when an error exists

When a computation error is caused, the programmable controller CPU changes to
the STOP status at the default value, however, changing the parameters continues
the programmable controller CPU to run.
Computation error example

• In the division instruction, the processing to divide by 0 is executed.
1) Double-click "PLC parameter" on the navigation

window.
1) Double-click!
2) The Q Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed.

Click the "PLC RAS" tab.
2) Click!
3) Change the setting of "Computation Error" in

"Operation Mode When There Is an Error" to
"Continue"
4) Click the End button.

3) Change!
4) Click!
3-5
MEMO
3-6
CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE AND BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -PART 1-
4.1 List of Instruction Explained in this Chapter
This chapter explains the sequence instructions and basic instructions as shown
below.
Instruction Instruction
symbol Function Drawing (devices to be used) symbol Function Drawing (devices to be used)
(Name) (Name)
OUT Conditional jump CJ Pn

Coil output CJ
Out (non-delay) n = 0 to 4095
Specifies a bit of a bit
device or word device. Pointer
Specifies a bit of a bit device

or word device. Conditional jump
MC
Starting master SCJ Pn
Master Nn MC Nn SCJ Jumps after one
*1
control n = 0 to 4095
control n = 0 to 14 scan
Pointer
Nesting
MCR
Master Terminating MCR Nn Calling subroutine CALL Pn
CALL
control master control n = 0 to 14 program n = 0 to 4095
Nesting Pointer
reset
Calling a
SET
SET subroutine CALLP Pn
Setting devices CALLP
Set program (pulsing n = 0 to 4095
Pointer
or word device. operation)
RST Returning from a

RST RET
Resetting devices subroutine RET
Reset Specifies a bit of a bit device Return
program
or word device.
Pulse
Generating the
PLS Terminating a
PLS pulses for one
FEND main routine FEND
Pulse program cycle
Specifies a bit of a bit device program
when a input or word device.
signal turns off
Pulf
Generating the
PLF pulses for one PLF
Pulf program cycle

when a input or word device.
signal turns off
*1: In GX Works2, the on/off status of the master control is displayed in the title tag
on the monitor screen.
4-1
<List of instructions not explained in this chapter: part 1>
"Introduction: PLC Course" covers the instructions shown below. The conventional A
series also support them.
Refer to "MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual Common Instruction" for more details.
(Name) (Name)
Starting a logical
operation
LD Starting to operate MRD Intermediate
Load a normally open Specifies a bit of a bit device Lead branching
contact or word device.
Starting a logical
LDI inverse operation
Starting to operate MPP Terminating
Load
a normally closed Pop branching
inverse Specifies a bit of a bit device
contact or word device.
Logical AND
operation
AND Series connection NOP For a space or deleting a
Ignored
And of normally open Nop program
contacts or word device.
Logical AND
ANI inverse operation END processing of
Series connection END Must be used as an end of a
And terminating a
of normally closed End program.
inverse Specifies a bit of a bit device program
contacts or word device.
Logical OR
operation
OR Parallel connection
STOP Stopping operation STOP
Or of normally open
contacts
or word device.
Logical OR inverse
operation
ORI SFT 1-bit shift for SFT
Parallel connection
Or inverse of normally closed Shift devices Specifies a bit of a bit device
contacts Specifies a bit of a bit device
or word device. or word device.
AND operation
between logical 1-bit shift for SFTP
ANB blocks SFTP
devices (pulsing
And block Series connection Shift P Specifies a bit of a bit device
operation)
of blocks or word device.
OR operation
between logical Ignored
ORB
blocks NOPLF (for a page break NOPLF
Or block Parallel connection
at printing)
of blocks
Ignored
MPS
Starting a branch PAGE (Recognized as PAGE n
Push
zero step of n-page)
4-2
<List of instructions not explained in this chapter: part 2>
The instructions listed below are intended for the Q series and not supported by the
A series.
Some of them are explained in "Q Programming Applied Course".
Refer to "MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual Common Instruction" for more details.
(Name) (Name)
Converting a
LDP Starting to operate
MEF result into a falling
Load P a rising pulse Specifies a bit of a bit device pulse Specifies a bit of a bit device
LDF Starting to operate INV Inverting the

Load F a falling pulse Specifies a bit of a bit device Inverse operation results
Vn
Converting a result
ANDP Series connection EGP
into a rising pulse
And P of rising pulses Specifies a bit of a bit device Edge P
(Memorized by Vn) Specifies a bit of a bit device
Vn
Converting a result
ANDF Series connection EGF
into a falling pulse
And F of falling pulses Specifies a bit of a bit device Edge F
(Memorized by Vn) Specifies a bit of a bit device
Parallel FF
ORP Inverting a device
connection of FF
Or P output
rising pulses Specifies a bit of a bit device Specifies a bit of a bit device
Parallel Converting a
ORF DELTA
connection of direct output into a DELTA
Or F Delta DY
falling pulses Specifies a bit of a bit device pulse
or word device.
Converting a Converting a
DELTAP
MEP result into a rising direct output into a DELTAP
Delta P DY
pulse Specifies a bit of a bit device pulse
or word device.
4-3
4.2 Differences between OUT and SET / RST
Project name QB-1

Program name MAIN
OUT instruction
X0
0 Y70
• The OUT instruction turns the specified device on when the input condition turns
on, and turns the device off when the condition turns off.
[Timing chart]
X0
Y70
Project name QB-2

Program name MAIN
SET/RST instruction
X0
0 SET Y70
X1
2 RST Y70
• The SET instruction turns the specified device on when the input condition turns
on, and holds the on status of the device even when the condition turns off.
To turn off the device, use the RST instruction.
[Timing chart]
X0
X1
Y70
4-4
4.3 Measuring Timer
Project name QB-3

Program name MAIN
K30
X5
0 T0
Timer setting value (time limit: 3.0sec.)

T0
5 Y70
T0
7 Y71
*: OUT T is a 4-step instruction.
[Timing chart]
• The timer contact
Contact X5
operates delaying by a set
time after the coil is
energized. (On delay
Coil T0
timer)
3.0sec. • The timer setting range is
Normally open contact T0,
coil Y70
from K1 to K32767.
Low-speed (100ms) timer
Normally closed contact 0b,
coil Y71 0.1 to 3276.7sec.
High-speed (10ms) timer
0.01 to 327.67sec.
• When the timer setting
value is set to 0, it turns on
(time-out) by the execution
of the instruction.
• The following four types of timer are available.
Type Timer No. (default)

Low-speed Counts time in • Change the output
timer············· units of 100ms. Default instruction (OUT) to
High-speed Counts time in T0 to T2047 (2048) OUTH to select the
timer············· units of 10ms. high-speed timer or
Low-speed Accumulates high-speed retentive timer.
retentive time in units of Default: 0 • To use the retentive timer,
timer············· 100ms. set the device points for
The value can be the retentive timer in the
High-speed Accumulates changed using the device setting of the PLC
retentive time in units of parameter. parameter.
timer············· 10ms.
Refer to section 6.4 for explanation on the retentive timers.
4-5
4.4 Counting by Counter
Project name QB-4

Program name MAIN
K12
X1
0 C20
Set value in counter

C20
5 Y72
X7
7 RST C20
*: OUT C is a 4-step instruction.
[Timing chart]
• The counter counts when
Contact X1 an input signal rises.
• After the count, the
subsequent input signals
are not counted.
Coil C20
• Once the counter counts,
1 2 3 11 12 0
(Current value of counter) the contact status and the
current counter value do
Contact C20, coil Y72 not change until the RST
instruction is executed.
• Executing the RST
instruction before the count
Contact X7 (input of RST instruction)
returns the counter to 0.
• The counter setting range
is from K0 and K32767. (K0
turns on (counts up) by the
execution of the
instruction.)
• In addition to the direct specification using K, indirect specification using D (data

register) is available.
Set value • The counter C30 counts
D10 when the number of rising
X0
Digital switch
0 2 4 0 C30 edges on the input signal
X0 becomes the same as
the number (such as 24)
C30 specified by the data
5 Y71
D10 24 register D10.
• This indirect specification is
useful for applying a value
specified with an external
digital switch to the counter.
The indirect specification
using the data register D is
also available for the timer.
4-6
Project name QEX1
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
When the conveyor belt operation start switch (X0) is turned on, the buzzer (Y70)
beeps for three seconds and the conveyor belt (Y71) starts to operate.
The conveyor belt automatically stops when the sensor (X1) detects that six
packages have passed through.
Sensor
(X1)
Conveyor
Motor
Control panel
Operating panel
MC
Operation Buzzer
(X0) (Y70)
(Y71)
Create the following ladder and check that it operates properly.
X0 C0
0 M0 During operation
M0
M0 Y71
4 Y70 Buzzer
M0 K30
7 T0 3-sec. timer
T0
12 Y71 Operating the conveyor
X1 K6
14 C0 Counter for counting
Y71 the number of packages
19 RST C0
4-7
Operating Procedure
(1) Creating a new project
(a) Click on the toolbar.
Click
(b) The New Project dialog box is displayed.

Set "Project Type" to "Simple Project", "PLC Series" to "QCPU (Q mode)",
and "PLC Type" to "Q06UDH". Then click the OK button.
Click
(c) If the project in preparation exists, the confirmation dialog box for saving
the project is displayed.
Click the No button.
Click
(d) The screen shifts to the new project creation mode.
4-8
(2) Creating a program
[Using the keyboard]
F5 X 0 Shift + F5 C 0 F7 M 0
F4
Conversion
[Using the tool buttons]
Enter "X0" after (a) Click on the toolbar to open the

clicking .
Click Enter Symbol window.
(b) Enter "X0" with the keyboard and click

the OK button.
Enter "C0" after

clicking . (c) Click on the toolbar to open the
Click
Enter Symbol window.
(d) Enter "C0" with the keyboard and click

the OK button.
Enter "M0" after

clicking . (e) Click on the toolbar to open the
Enter Symbol window.
(f) Enter "M0" with the keyboard and click

the OK button.
Click
(g) When creating the circuit is finished,
click [Compile] → [Build].
4-9
(3) Writing the project to the programmable controller
(a) Write the created ladder to the memory on the programmable controller.
Set the RUN/STOP switch
of the CPU to STOP.
Click on the toolbar.

The Online Data Operation dialog box is displayed.
Click
(b) Click the Parameter + Program button. Checkboxes for the target
program and the target parameter displayed in the window are
automatically marked ( ).
(c) Click the Execute button.
Click
Click this button after the

program name (MAIN) and
PLC parameter appear and
their checkboxes are marked.
4 - 10
(d) If parameters have been already written, the confirmation dialog box for
overwriting the parameters is displayed. Click the Yes button.
Click
(e) The Write to PLC dialog box is displayed.
(f) If a program has already been written, the confirmation dialog box for
overwriting the program is displayed. Click the Yes button.
Click
4 - 11
(g) Writing the program to the programmable controller is finished.
4 - 12
(4) Monitoring the ladder
Monitor the ladder.
Hold the RESET/STOP/RUN switch on the CPU
at the RESET position for one second or more,
then set the switch to RUN.
(a) Click on the toolbar.
Click
(b) The ladder (write) screen is used to monitor the ladder.
Operation Practice
1) Turning on the push button switch (X0) turns on Y70 and starts T0 at the
same time.
2) When the timer T0 counts three seconds (time-out), Y70 turns off and Y71
turns on at the same time.
3) Turn on or off (push or release) the push button switch (X1). The counter
C0 counts the number of ON to turn off Y71 after counting on six times.
4 - 13
4.5 PLS Pulse (turns on the specified device for one scan at rising edge of an input condition.)
PLF Pulf (turns on the specified device for one scan at falling edge of an input condition.)
Project name QB-5

Program name MAIN
X0 1
0 PLS M5
X1 2
3 PLF M0
1 • The PLS instruction turns on the specified device only for one scan when the
execution command is turned on from off.
[Timing chart]
X0
M5
One scan One scan
2 • The PLF instruction turns on the specified device only for one scan when the
execution command is turned off from on.
[Timing chart]
X1
M0
One scan One scan
4 - 14
Application
• The instructions can be used in the standby program that waits for the operation
condition.
Execution command
X0
PLS M0
M0
SET M5
M5
Y70
Execution condition K50
TO
TO
RST M5
[Timing chart]
X0
(trigger)
M0
M5
Y70
5sec.
(operation)
Time to wait for

condition met
Execution
condition
Number of basic
Applicable device
Constant
Internal device MELSECNET/ Intelligent

Pointer
steps
Level
File Index
Digit
(system or 10 (H) Direct function

register register
user) Jn\ module
Bit Word R Bit Word Un\G Z K H P I N
PLS D
D 2
PLF D
4 - 15
• The instructions can be used for a program that detects passage of moving
objects.
After the passage of a product is detected, the next process for the product is
started.
X0
PLF M0
M0
SET Y70 Product
Y70 Sensor
Sensor
(Detection of input from X0) Conveyor
[Timing chart]
X0
M0
Y70
Other Useful Ways of PLS and PLF Part 1

• The instructions can be used for a program that executes the output operation for
a set period of time when the input signal changes from on to off.
[Timing chart]
Input
(X0)
Output
(Y76) Set time limit
Pulse duration
10sec.
[Program example]
Project name QB-6
Program name MAIN
X0
0 PLF M1
M1 T16 K100
3 T16
Y76
Y76
4 - 16
Other Useful Ways of PLS and PLF Part 2
• The program for the repeated operation such as switching on/off status alternately
by pressing the push button switch can be made with the instructions.
If the PLS instruction is used in the above program, the rising edge caused when
the push button switch is pressed triggers the program. If the PLF instruction is
used, the falling edge caused when the switch is released is the trigger.
[Timing chart]
X0
Y70
Y71
[Program example]
Project name QB-7
Program name MAIN
X0
0 PLS M0
PLF M1
M0 Y70
5 Y70
M0 Y70
M1 Y71
11 Y71
M1 Y71
4 - 17
Project name QEX2
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
Create the following ladder and check that it operates properly.
X2
0 PLS M0
M0 X0
3 Y70
Y70
X3
7 PLF M1
M1 X1
10 Y71
Y71
[Timing chart]
X2
M0
PLS
Y70
X0
X3
M1
PLF
Y71
X1
REFERENCE
The following is a timing chart of a lockup ladder programmed using the OUT
instruction. Compare this with the lockup ladder created using the PLS
instruction.
X2
Y70
X0
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
4 - 18
Operating Procedure
The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure in section
4.4.
Operation Practice
• Turning on X2 turns on Y70, and turning on X0 turns off Y70. (Even when X2 stays
on, turning on X0 turns off Y70.)
• Turning on X3 turns on Y71, and turning on X1 turns off Y71.
Related Exercise –––– Exercise 3
REMARK
Input pulse processing is not required for the QCPU as it uses a derivative
contact ( / ).
[For A/AnSCPU]
X0
PLS M0
M0
SET M5
[For QCPU]
X0
SET M5
Supported instructions are; LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, and ORF.
4 - 19
4.6 MC Master Control (Start)
MCR Master Control Reset (End)
Project name QB-8

Program name MAIN
X7
0 MC NO M98
X2
3 Y70
X3
5 Y71
7 MCR NO
• The above program is a basic one.

• MC N M to MCR N (indicated as "MC to MCR" hereafter.)
The available nesting (N) numbers for "MC to MCR" are from N0 and N14.
• The scan time skipped by "MC to MCR" hardly changes.
The device status of the program skipped by "MC to MCR" becomes as follows;
All the devices in the OUT instruction are turned off.
The devices in the SET, RST, and SFT instructions, the counter, and retentive
timer keep their statuses.
The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are reset to 0.
Application
• The instructions can be used for a program for switching between manual and
automatic operations. (Refer to Ladder example.)
Applicable device
Number of basic
Constant

Pointer
steps
Level
File Index
Digit

register register
user) Jn\ module
MC n D n 2
MCR n D 1
The number of basic steps of the MC instruction is two, and that of the MCR instruction is one.
4 - 20
Nested "MC to MCR" Program Example
• The MC and MCR instructions can be nested as shown below.
Project name QB-9

Program name MAIN
X5
0 Y70
X2
2 MC N0 M6
N0 M6 K5
X6
5 C0
X3
10 MC N1 M7
1
N1 M7 K100
N1 N0
X7 b a
13 TO
18 MCR N1
X8
19 Y71
21 MCR N0
X0
22 SET Y72
X4
24 MC N0 M8 2
N0 M8
X1 N0
27 c
RST Y72
29 MCR N0
X9
30 Y73
3
M6
32 Y74 d
1 • The "MC to MCR" program a is nested under the "MC to MCR" program b . (It
is called "nested structure".)
In this case;
1) Assign the nesting number (N) of the MC instructions in ascending order.
2) Assign the nesting number (N) of the MCR instructions used for the MC in
descending order.
2 • The "MC to MCR" program a can be independent from the c program. The
same nesting numbers (N) can be used in the both programs.
• The internal relay number (M) must be changed for each MC instruction.
3 • As shown in the d program, the internal relay number M of MC can be used

as a contact.
Note) In GX Works2, the on/off status of the master control is displayed in the title tag on
the monitor screen.
4 - 21
Project name QEX3
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
The following program switches between manual and automatic operations using
the MC and MCR instructions.
• When the manual operation is selected by turning off X7;
1) Turning X2 sets the system to the low-speed operation mode.
2) Turning X3 sets the system to the high-speed operation mode.
• When the automatic operation is selected by turning on X7, the system operates in
the low-speed mode for 3sec. after X0 is turned on. Then the system operates in
the high-speed mode for 10sec. and stops.
High speed
Low speed
3sec. 10sec.
Manual
X7
0 MC N0 M10
N0 M10
X2 M82
3 M81 Instruction for manual low-speed
X3 M81
6 M82 Instruction for manual high-speed
9 MCR N0
Automatic
X7
10 MC N0 M11
N0 M11
X0 T1
13 Y70 Automatic start
Y70
MC N1 M12
N1 M12
Y70 M72
19 M71 Instruction for auto low-speed
M71 K30
T0
T0
27 M72 Instruction for auto high-speed
M72 K100
T1
34 MCR N0
M71
35 Y71 Low-speed operation
M81
M72
38 Y72 High-speed operation
M82
Note) In GX Works2, the on/off status of the master control is displayed in the title tag on the
monitor screen.
4 - 22
Operating Procedure
4.4.
Operation Practice
• The manual operation is selected by turning off the X7 switch.
When the X2 switch is turned on, Y71 lights and the low-speed operation is
executed. To select the high-speed operation, turn on the X3 switch. Y72 lights
and the high-speed operation starts.
• The automatic operation is selected by turning on the X7 switch.
When the X0 switch is turned on, Y70 lights indicating that the automatic operation
is activated.
At the same time, Y71 also lights for 3sec. indicating the system is in the
low-speed mode. After the 3sec. have elapsed, Y72 lights for 10sec. indicating
that the system is in high-speed mode. Then the operation is stopped. (Y70, Y71,
and Y72 have stopped lighting at the end.)
NOTE
For the MCR instructions in one nested program block, all master controls in
the program can be terminated with the lowest nesting (N) number only.
4 - 23
4.7 FEND / CJ / SCJ / CALL / RET
Project name QB-10

Program name MAIN
4.7.1 FEND F end
FEND FEND is a 1-step instruction.
• Use the FEND instruction as the END instruction under the following conditions;
1) When a sequence program must be executed and terminated in each program
block.
For example, use the FEND instruction with the CJ and SCJ instructions.
2) When using subroutine programs (CALL and RET instructions)
3) When using an interrupt program
• After each execution of the FEND instruction, the programmable controller
processes the current value of the timer and counter and executes self-diagnostic
check, and then re-operates from the step 0.
0
CALL P**
Operation Sequence program Sequence program

when CJ is
not executed Jump by CJ FEND
CJ P**
P**
Operation when Subroutine program
Sequence program CJ is executed
FEND I**
Interrupt program
P**
Sequence program
END
END
(a) When operating in each program block (b) When using the subroutine
by the CJ instruction and interrupt programs
NOTE
• There is no limit on the number of the FEND instructions in a sequence program,
however, they cannot be used in the subroutine and interrupt programs.
• The FEND instruction cannot be used to terminate the main or sub sequence
program.
Make sure to use the END instruction for the end of a whole program.
REFERENCE
The interrupt program stops the current process and processes an interrupt
upon receiving an interrupt request while a normal program is being processed.
4 - 24
Project name QEX6
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
Create the following ladder with GX Works2 and write it to the CPU of the
demonstration machine. Then check that the FEND instruction operates properly.
X3
0 CJ P10
X4
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X5
6 Y72
Operating Procedure
4.4.
4 - 25
Operation Practice
Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with GX Works2 and written to
the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the screen.
X3
0 CJ P10
X4
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X5
6 Y72
9 END
(1) When X3 is off Operation when X3 is off

(a) The operation is executed from 0
0 LD X3
to FEND.
1 CJ P10
(b) Turning on or off X4 turns on or
3 LD X4
off Y70.
4 OUT Y70 Jump by CJ
(c) Turning on or off X5 does not 5 FEND
change Y72. 6 P10
7 LD X5
(2) When X3 is on 8 OUT Y72
(a) The program jumps to the pointer 9 END
P10 by the CJ instruction.
(b) Turning on or off X4 does not Operation when X3 is on
change Y70.
(c) Turning on or off X5 turns on or
off Y72.
4 - 26
4.7.2 CJ (Conditional jump: instantaneous execution condition jump)
SCJ (S conditional jump: execution condition jump after one scan)
1
X0
0 CJ P10
2
X1
3 SCJ P10
X0 X1
6 Y70
9 FEND
Pointer
P10
X3
10 Y71
1 • The CJ instruction instantaneously executes a program jumping it to the specified

address (pointer number) when the execution command is on.
When the command is off, the program is not jumped.
2 • The SCJ instruction executes a program without jumping it for the scan when the
execution command is turned on. From the next scan, the instruction executes the
program jumping it to the specified address (pointer number).
When the command is off, the program is not jumped.
• The SCJ instruction is used when some operations must be executed before
jumping the program.
For example, when the output needs to be on or reset in advance.
[Timing chart]
Input condition
(X0, X1)
Executes
CJ Executes every scan every scan
Executes Executes
SCJ every scan every scan
One scan One scan
4 - 27
NOTE
• The pointer numbers available for both CJ and SCJ instructions are P0 to P4095.
• Use the FEND instruction as shown below when a program using the CJ and SCJ
instructions must be concluded in each program block. (Refer to section 4.7.1 for
FEND.)
Start When CJ is not When CJ is

0 executed executed
Sequence program A
Input condition Step 0 Step 0
Sequence
program A CJ P
CJP
Sequence program B
Is input YES
condition on? FEND FEND
P
P Sequence program C
NO
Sequence Sequence END

program B program C
END
• The status of ladders skipped by the CJ instruction remains unchanged.

(Before CJ execution) (During CJ execution)
X0 X0
1100 CJ P10 1100 CJ P10
X2 X2
1103 Y72 1103 Y72 Because X0 is on, all instructions
within this area are not executed.
Hence Y72 remains on even
P10 X1 P10 X1 after X2 is turned off.
1330 PLS M1 1330 PLS M1
• After the timer coil has turned on, jumping the timer of a coil that is on using the
CJ, SCJ, or JMP instruction interrupts an accurate measurement.
Applicable device
Number of basic
Constant

Pointer
steps
Level
File Index
Digit

register register
user) Jn\ module
CJ P**
P 2
SCJ P**
4 - 28
Project name QEX4
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check the difference between the CJ and SCJ
instructions.
X0
0 CJ P10
X1
3 SCJ P10
X0 X1
6 Y70
9 FEND
P10 X3
10 Y71
Operating Procedure
4.4.
4 - 29
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 and X1 are off, the CJ and SCJ (2) When X0 is turned on, the CJ instruction is
instructions are not executed. executed and the program jumps to P10.
Therefore, Y70 is on. Therefore, Y70 remains on.
[Before CJ and SCJ execution] [During CJ execution] First scan and subsequent
scans
X0 X0
CJ P10 CJ P10
X1 X1
SCJ P10 SCJ P10
X0 X1 X0 X1
Y70 Y70
FEND FEND
P10 X3 P10 X3
Y71 Y71
(3) Turning off X0 and on X1 executes the SCJ instruction and jumps the program to P10 from the second
scan. Therefore, Y70 turns off.
[During SCJ execution] First scan [During SCJ execution] Second scan and
subsequent scans
X0 Second scan X0
CJ P10 and CJ P10
subsequent
X1 scans
X1
First scan SCJ P10 SCJ P10
after ON
after ON
X0 X1 X0 X1
Y70 Y70
FEND FEND
P10 X3 P10 X3
Y71 Y71
(4) Y71 is turned on or off when the CJ and SCJ instructions are executed.
• The following lists explain the difference between the CJ and SCJ instructions.
Second scan and
subsequent scans
after X1 ON
First scan only
0 LD X0 0 LD X0
1 CJ P10 1 CJ P10
3 LD X1 3 LD X1
4 SCJ P10 4 SCJ P10
6 LDI X0 6 LDI X0
7 ANI X1 7 ANI X1
8 OUT Y70 8 OUT Y70
9 FEND 9 FEND
10 P10 10 P10
11 LD X3 11 LD X3
12 OUT Y71 12 OUT Y71
13 END 13 END
4 - 30
4.7.3 CALL(P) Call
Executing a subroutine program
RET Return
M0
0 CALL P10
M5 X2 Sequence
50 CALL P10
program
103 FEND
1
P10
2 X1
104 Y70
Subroutine
program
157 RET
• The above program is a basic style to execute the subroutine program using the
CALL and RET instructions.
Keep this structure, otherwise an error occurs and the programmable controller
stops.
1 • A subroutine program consists of the ladders for executing the same data many
times in one program.
A subroutine program starts at a pointer P and ends with the RET instruction.
2 • The pointer P number is from 0 to 4095. (Same as the pointer numbers used for
the CJ and SCJ instructions.)
• A subroutine program is executed as shown in the following diagrams.
(When CALL P10 is not executed) (When CALL P10 is executed)

0 0 0
Sequence program
Input condition CALL P10

CALL P10 Next step
after CALL
Sequence program
FEND P10 FEND

FEND
P10
Subroutine program
Sequence program
Execution of
subroutine program
RET
RET
END
4 - 31
Nesting
• The CALL (P) instructions can be nested up to 16 levels.
Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine

program program program program program
Sequence program
0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
CALL P3
CALL P5
CALL P1 CALL P4
CALL P2 RET RET
RET
RET
RET
FEND
The following ladder circuit shows the above nested program.
CALL P1
Sequence program
FEND
P1
CALL P2 Subroutine program P1

RET
P2

RET
P3

RET
P4

RET
P5
RET
Subroutine program P5
Applicable device
Number of basic
Constant

Pointer
Level
steps
File Index
Digit

register register
user) Jn\ module
Un\G
Bit Word R Bit Word Z K H P I N
CALL(P) P** P 2
RET 1
The number of basic steps of CALL (P) is 2 tn, and that of the RET instruction is one.
("n" is an argument passed to the subroutine.)
4 - 32
Project name QEX5
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the CALL and RET instructions operate
properly.
X2
0 CALL P10
X3
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X4
6 Y71
9 RET
Operating Procedure
4.4.
4 - 33
Operation Practice
Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with GX Works2 and written to
the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the screen.
X2
0 CALL P10
X3
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X4
6 Y71
9 RET
10 END
(1) When X2 is off Operation when X2 is off

(a) The operation is executed from 0 to
0 LD X2
FEND.
1 CALL P10
(b) Turning on or off X3 turns on or off
3 LD X3
Y70.
4 OUT Y70
(c) Turning on or off X4 does not change
5 FEND
Y71. 6 P10
7 LD X4
(2) When X2 is on 8 OUT Y71
(a) After the subroutine of P10 is 9 RET
executed, the operation from step 3
to FEND is executed. Operation when X2 is on
(b) Turning on or off X3 turns on or off
Y70.
(c) Turning on or off X4 turns on or off
Y71.
4 - 34
Project name QTEST1
Program name MAIN
4.8 Exercise
4.8.1 Exercise 1
LD to NOP
When X0 turns on, Y70 is self-maintained, and Y74 and Y77 flicker alternately every
0.5sec.
When X1 turns on, Y70 turns off and flickering of Y74 and Y77 also stops.
[Timing chart]
X0
Y70
TO
Y74
T1
Y77
X1
0.5sec. 0.5sec. 0.5sec. 0.5sec.
Create the following program with GX Works2 filling in the blanks . Then,
check the operation using the demonstration machine.
X0 2)
0 Y70
1)
Y70 3) K5
4 T0
4) K5
10 T1
Y74
5) Y70
16 Y77
4 - 35
Project name QTEST2
Program name MAIN
4.8.2 Exercise 2
SET, RST
When X0 is turned on, Y70 starts to flicker at one-second intervals and stops the
flickering for five seconds after flickering 10 times, then restarts flickering.
The flickering of Y70 can be stopped by turning on X1.
X0
0 1)
M0 M1 T1 K10
2 T0
T0 K10
T1
T0
Y70
K10
C0
2) 3)
23 4)
K50
T2
T2
30 RST M1
5)
X1
36 6)
7)
8)
1) 5)
2) 6)
3) 7)
4) 8)
4 - 36
Hint
(1) The following shows the timing chart of the program.
X0
M0
X1
Restart
Contact T0
1sec.
Contact T1
1sec
One scan
Y70
1sec. 1sec. 5sec.
Contact C0
Counter of C0 1. 2. 10. 1. 2.0.
(2) The following shows the basic flickering ladder and its timing chart.
[Ladder] [Timing chart]
K10 Start
T1 Contact
T0 T0
1sec.
K10
T0
T1 Contact
T1 1sec.
One scan
REFERENCE
• The flickering ladder can be created using the special relay that generates
clock as shown below.
SM413 (2-sec. clock) In addition to the SM413 (2-sec. clock) on
Y70 the left, the following can be used.
SM409 (0.01-sec. clock)
SM410 (0.1-sec. clock)
[Timing chart] SM411 (0.2-sec. clock)
SM412 (1-sec. clock)
Y70
1sec. 1sec.1sec. SM414 (2n-sec. clock)
SM415 (2n-msec. clock)
The clock starts from OFF when the
programmable controller is reset or the
power is turned on.
4 - 37
Project name QTEST3
Program name MAIN
4.8.3 Exercise 3
PLS, PLF
Y70 starts to switch between ON and OFF alternately when X0 is turned on, and
turning off X0 triggers Y71 to operate in the same way as Y70 does.
[Timing chart]
X0
Y70
Y71
X0
0 1) M0
2) M1
M0 Y70
5 Y70
M0 Y70
M1 Y71
11 Y71
M1 Y71
1)
2)
4 - 38
Project name QTEST4
Program name MAIN
4.8.4 Exercise 4
CJ, CALL, RET, FEND

Y70 and Y71 flicker for 0.5sec. alternately when X7 is off, and when X7 is on, Y72
and Y73 flicker for 1.0sec. alternately. Turning on X0 resets the currently flickering
Y70 to Y73.
Fill in the blanks . Then, check the operation using the demonstration machine.
X7
CJ 1)
SM401
RST Y72
RST Y73
T11 K5
T10
T10 K5
T11
Flip flop
Y70 ladder
T10
Y71
X0
2) P10
3)
SM401
P0 RST Y70
RST Y71
T20 K10
T21
T21 K10
T20
Flip flop
Y72 ladder
T21
Y73
X0
4) P10
5)
SM401
P10 RST Y70
RST Y71
RST Y72
RST Y73
6)
4 - 39
Hint
START 1)
2)
<CJ P0>
3)
Y
X7 ON? 4)
N 5)
P0 6)
Y72,Y73 Y70,Y71
Reset Reset
Y70,Y71 Y72,Y73
0.5-sec. flickering 1-sec. flickering
Y Y
X0 ON? X0 ON?
N N
P10
Y70Y73 Subroutine
Reset program
<FEND>
<FEND>
END
4 - 40
Answers for the exercises in Chapter 4
Exercise No. Answer
1) Y70
2) X1
1 3) T1
4) T0
5) Y74
1) SET M0
2) C0
3) Y70
4) SET M1
2
5) RST C0
6) RST M0
7) RST C0
8) RST M1
1) PLS
3
2) PLF
1) P0
2) CALL
3) FEND
4
4) CALL
5) FEND
6) RET
4 - 41
MEMO
4 - 42
CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION -PART 2-
5.1 Notation of Values (Data)
The programmable controller CPU converts all input signals into ON or OFF signals
(logical 1 or 0, respectively) to store and process them. Therefore, the
programmable controller executes the numeric operation using the numeric values
stored with the logical 1 or 0 (binary numbers = BIN).
In daily life, a decimal number is regarded as the most commonly and the easiest
system. Therefore, the decimal-to-binary conversion or the reverse conversion is
required when values are written or read (monitored) to or from the programmable
controller. The programming system and some instructions have the function for the
decimal-to-binary conversion and the binary-to-decimal conversion.
This section explains how to express values (data) in decimal, binary, hexadecimal
and binary-coded decimal notation (BCD), and how to convert them.
Decimal
A decimal number system consists of ten symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9
which represent the order and size (amount).
After a digit reaches 9, an increment is reset to 0 and the next increment of the
next digit (to the left) is incremented.
The following shows how a decimal number (in this case 153) is represented.
153 = 100+50+3
= 1 100+5 10+3 1
= 1 102+5 101+3 100
Decimal symbol (0 to 9)
"Power of digit"
n : Digit number (0, 1, 2...)

10 : Decimal
In the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller, symbol "K" is used for
expressing values in decimal.
5-1
Binary (BIN)
The binary number system consists of two symbols: 0 and 1 which represent
the order and size (amount). After a digit reaches 1, an increment is reset to 0
and the next digit (to the left) is incremented. The two digits 0 and 1 are called
bits.
Binary Decimal
0 0
1 1
10 2
11 3
100 4
101 5
110 6
111 7
1000 8
…
…
The following example explains how to convert a binary number into a decimal
number.
"10011101"
The diagram below shows the binary number with the powers of two.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Binary
Base number raised
2 7 26 2 5 2
4 2 3 2 2 2
1 2 0
to the power of digit = Bit weights
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ("Binary")
The binary number is broken as follows.

= 1 × 128 + 0 × 64 + 0 × 32 + 1 × 16 + 1 × 8 + 1 × 4 + 0 × 2 + 1 × 1
= 128 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 1
= 157
The binary number can be calculated by adding each weight of bits whose
codes are 1.
5-2
Hexadecimal
The hexadecimal number system consists of 16 symbols: 0 to 9 and A to F
which represent the order and size (amount). After a digit reaches F, an
increment is reset to 0 and the next digit (to the left) is incremented.
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 100
5 5 101
6 6 110
7 7 111
8 8 1000
9 9 1001
10 A 1010
11 B 1011
12 C 1100
13 D 1101
14 E 1110
15 F 1111
16 10 10000
17 11 10001
18 12 10010
…
19101 4A9D …
0100 1010 1001 1101
3 2 1 0 Digit number
"Power of digit"
4 A 9 D Hexadecimal
n: Digit number
3 2 1
= (4) × 16 + (A) × 16 + (9) × 16 + (D) × 16 0 16: Hexadecimal
= 4 × 4096 + 10 × 256 + 9 × 16 + 13 × 1
= 19101
Four bits of a binary number equal to one digit of a hexadecimal number.

In the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller, symbol "H" is used for
indicating a hexadecimal number.
The hexadecimal system is used to represent the following device numbers.
• Input and output (X, Y)
• Function input and output (FX, FY)
• Link relay (B)
• Link register (W)
• Link special relay (SB)
• Link special register (SW)
• Link direct device (Jn\X, Jn\Y, Jn\B, Jn\SB, Jn\W, Jn\SW)
5-3
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
The binary-coded decimal is "a numerical system using a binary number to
represent a decimal number".
A decimal number 157, for example, is expressed as shown below.
2 1 0 Digit number
1 5 7 Decimal
(100) (10) (1) Power of digit
0001 0101 0111 BCD

842 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Binary bit weights
In BCD, decimal numbers 0 to 9999 (the biggest 4-digit number) can be

represented by 16 bits.
The diagram below shows the bit weights of BCD.
Thousand digits
Hundred digits
Ten digits
Unit digit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
8000
4000
2000
1000
80
40
20
10
1
800
400
200
100
BCD is used for the following signals.

1) Output signals of digital switches
2) Signals of seven-element display (digital display)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1(0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1)
2(0) (0) (1) (1) (0) (0) (1) (1) (0) (0)
4(0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (1) (1) (1) (0) (0)
8(0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (1)
COM
BCD code digital switch
5-4
How to convert the decimal number into the binary number
In the example below, a decimal number 157 is converted into the binary number.
1)
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Bit
157 weights
128
29
16
13
8
5
4
1
1
0
2)
Quotient
2 157 Remainder
2 78 1
2 39 0
2 19 1
2 9 1
2 4 1
2 2 0
1 0
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
How to convert the decimal number into the hexadecimal number

In the example below, a decimal number 157 is converted into the hexadecimal number.
1)
16 157 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
9 13(D)
9 D
5-5
Numerical values used by MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
● Usually, 8 bits are called 1 byte, and 16 bits (2 bytes) are called 1 word.
1 bit
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 byte
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 word (2 byte)
● Registers of each word device in the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller consist of 16
bits.
• Data register D D0
• Current value of
32768
16384
1
8192
4096
2048
1024
64
32
16
2
512
256
128
timer T (Binary bit weight)
• Current value of
counter C
• File register R
• Link register W
● The following two ranges of numbers can be processed in 16 bits (1 word).
1) 0 to 65535
2) -32768 to +32767
● The range 2) is available for the MELSEC-Q programmable controller.

The negative numbers adopt two's complement against the positive numbers (1 to +32767).
● In the two's complement, each binary bit is inverted, and 1 is added to the least significant bit.
Example)
How to calculate the two's complement against 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Invert all bits.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Add 1 to the least

significant bit.
-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The most significant bit of "1" means negative.

The most significant bit corresponds to the sign of a signed binary number.
5-6
BCD (binary coded decimal) BIN (binary) K (decimal) H (hexadecimal)
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0 0000
00000000 00000001 00000000 00000001 1 0001
00000000 00000010 00000000 00000010 2 0002
00000000 00000011 00000000 00000011 3 0003
00000000 00000100 00000000 00000100 4 0004
00000000 00000101 00000000 00000101 5 0005
00000000 00000110 00000000 00000110 6 0006
00000000 00000111 00000000 00000111 7 0007
00000000 00001000 00000000 00001000 8 0008
00000000 00001001 00000000 00001001 9 0009
00000000 00010000 00000000 00001010 10 000A
00000000 00010001 00000000 00001011 11 000B
00000000 00010010 00000000 00001100 12 000C
00000000 00010011 00000000 00001101 13 000D
00000000 00010100 00000000 00001110 14 000E
00000000 00010101 00000000 00001111 15 000F
00000000 00010110 00000000 00010000 16 0010
00000000 00010111 00000000 00010001 17 0011
00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 18 0012
00000000 00011001 00000000 00010011 19 0013
00000000 00100000 00000000 00010100 20 0014
00000000 00100001 00000000 00010101 21 0015
00000000 00100010 00000000 00010110 22 0016
00000000 00100011 00000000 00010111 23 0017
00000001 00000000 00000000 01100100 100 0064
00000001 00100111 00000000 01111111 127 007F
00000010 01010101 00000000 11111111 255 00FF
00010000 00000000 00000011 11101000 1000 03E8
00100000 01000111 00000111 11111111 2047 07FF
01000000 10010101 00001111 11111111 4095 0FFF
00100111 00010000 10000 2710
01111111 11111111 32767 7FFF
11111111 11111111 -1 FFFF
11111111 11111110 -2 FFFE
10000000 00000000 -32768 8000
5-7
System configuration and I/O number of demonstration machine
CPU module Output module

Power supply module Input module
Base unit Q38DB
Q61P QCPU Vacant QX QY Q64 Q62

slot 42 42P AD DAN
(64 (64 (16 (16
points) points) points) points)
X0 Y40
to to
USB cable X3F Y7F
Peripheral device
I/O panel
Y6F Y60 Y5F Y50 Y4F Y40

Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78
X3F X30 X2F X20

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
ON 1 9 4 2 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q
OFF
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 A/D INPUT D/A OUTPUT
ON
OFF
5-8
5.2 Transfer Instruction
Project name QB-11

Program name MAIN
5.2.1 MOV (P) 16-bit data transfer
K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
X1
13 RST C10
S D 1
X2
18 MOV T0 D0
X3
21 MOVP C10 D1
X4 2
24 MOVP K157 D2
X5 3
27 MOVP H4A9D D3
1 ● When the input condition turns on, the current value of the timer T0 is transferred
to the data register D0.
S ... Source, D ... Destination
● The current value of T0 is stored in the register in binary (BIN code). And the
value is transferred to the data register D0 in binary (The code is not converted at
the transfer.)
T0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 45
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
2 ● When the input condition turns on, the decimal number 157 is transferred to the
data register D2. And the value is stored in the register in binary. The decimal
number (K) is converted into binary automatically, then transferred.
K157
D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
5-9
3 ● When the input condition turns on, the hexadecimal number 4A9D is transferred
to the data register D3.
H4A9D
(4) (A) (9) (D) Hexadecimal

numbers
D3 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Binary numbers
64
32
16
32768
16384
512
256
128
8
4
2
1
8192
4096
2048
1024
Bit weights
Difference between MOV and MOVP
The P of MOVP stands for a pulse.
Input condition
Data is transferred every scan

MOV while the input condition is on.
Data is transferred only one scan

MOVP after the input condition turns on.
(For only once)
Executed only once.
● Use the MOV instruction when reading the changing data for all the time.
Use the MOVP instruction to transfer data instantaneously such as setting
data or reading data at an error.
● Both of the following ladder programs function similarly.
X4 X4
MOVP K157 D2 PLS M1
M1
MOV K157 D2
Applicable device
Number of basic
Internal
Intelligent
Pointer
Level
steps
device File MELSECNET/10 Index

Digit
function Constant
(system or register (H) Direct Jn\ register
module
user)
Un\G
S
MOV S D *
D
*: The number of steps varies depending on the device to be used.
5 - 10
Check The CPU is running.
The inputs X2, X3, X4, X5, and X7 are on.
Monitor the contents of the data registers D0 to D3.

• After writing the data to the programmable controller, click [Online] →
[Monitor] → [Device/Buffer Memory Batch].
The Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor dialog box is displayed.
• Enter "D0" in the Device Name column of the Device/Buffer Memory Batch
Monitor dialog box and press the Enter key.
Enter "D0".
Press the Enter key after
entering the device.
5 - 11
Current values of a timer
and counter are monitored.
(They are changing.)
Indicates that a decimal
number 157 (K157) is stored.
This is a decimal number

equivalent to a hexadecimal 4A9D.
Indicates the word devices in the on/off of the bit units.

: OFF (0 in binary)
: ON (1 in binary)
(4) (A) (9) (D) Hexadecimal

numbers
D3 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 H4A9D
Binary bit
16
64
32
256
512
8192
4096
2048
128
1024
16384
1
weights
Sign bit
19101
5 - 12
• Click the Display Format button.
• Change the display of the numerical value in the monitor to the hexadecimal
notation.
• Select "HEX" for the device batch monitoring.
[Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen]
• Change the display of the numerical value in the monitor to the binary
notation.
Select "Word Multi-point" in Monitor Format for the device batch monitoring.

Values Values Values Values
in D0 in D1 in D2 in D3
5 - 13
Project name QEX7
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the MOV instruction works properly.
X0
0 MOV K200 D0
MOV D0 D1
X1
5 RST D0
RST D1
Operating Procedure
The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure in section 4.4.
• How to modify the

To modify the transfer instruction, follow the procedures below.
transfer instruction
Example: Change the transfer data K200 of [MOV K200 D0] to K100
1) Double-click the instruction to be modified.
2) The Enter Symbol window is displayed.
3) Write "1" over "2" of "MOV K200 D0".
4) Click the OK button on the Enter Symbol window.
All data in can be modified with the above method.

When "Insert" is displayed, press the Insert key to change it to "Ovrwrte"
before modifying.
5) After finishing modifications, click [Compile] → [Build].
5 - 14
Operation Practice
Check that "200" is displayed under both D0 and D1 on the monitor screen when X0
on the control panel of the demonstration machine is turned on.
X0
0 MOV K200 D0
200
MOV D0 D1
200 200
X1
5 RST D0
RST D1
10 END
When X0 turns on, the current values

of D0 and D1 become 200.
Related Exercise ---- Exercise 5
5 - 15
Project name QB-12
Program name MAIN
5.2.2 BIN (P) BCD → BIN data conversion instruction
Operations to read and write data after step 35

K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
S D
X0
30 BINP K4X20 D5
X0
34 MOV K4X20 D6
Check the difference

from the BIN instruction.
• When the input condition is turned on, the data in the device specified in S is
recognized as a BCD code, converted into binary (BIN code), and transferred to
the device specified in D .
8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
S side BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousand digits Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits

Converted into BIN
16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
D side BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Becomes 0.
• The ordinary digital switches generate BCD codes. Therefore, the BIN instruction
is required for writing data from the digital switches to the programmable
controller.
4096
512
32
1 2 3 4 Digital switch
16
4 8 4 2 1) 8 4 2) 1 8 4 2) 1) 8 4) 2 1
K4X20
X2D
X2C
X2E
X2B
X2A
X2F
4660
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
X20
D6
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 When the BCD code
is input without converted.
32
16
64
256
512
8192
4096
2048
128
1024
16384
1024
128
64 D5
16 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 When the BCD code is input after
2 converted into the binary code.
32
64
16
256
512
8192
4096
2048
128
1024
16384
2
4
1234
5 - 16
K4X20
Word devices D (data register), T (timer current value), and C (counter current
value) consist of 16 bits (1 word), and data is basically transferred among the
units of one device.
Collecting 16 bit devices (such as X, Y, and M) means processing the word
device. The device numbers allocated to the bit devices must be in consecutive
order.
In the bit device, data are processed in units of four.
Number
1 2 3 4 of digits
8 4 2 1) 8 4 2) 1 8 4 2) 1) 8 4) 2 1 K4 X20
X2D
X2C
X2E
X2B
X2A
X2F
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
X20
Start number
Specify these devices to K2X28 K1X20
Read one-digit data "4".
read two-digit data "12". (X2F toX28) (X23 to X20)
K2X20
Read two-digit data "34".
(X27 to X20)
K3X20
Read three-digit data "234".
(X2B to X20)
K4X20
Read four-digit data "1234".
(X2F to X20)
As long as four bit devices are in consecutive order, any bit device can be specified as the first.
Other bit devices can be processed in the same way as described above.
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
(Internal relay M) 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K2M6 K1M0
K3M5
* A sample program using a digital switch to import data is provided

in page App. - 46.
Applicable device
Number of basic

Pointer
Level
steps
File Index
Digit
(system or 10 (H) Direct function Constant

register register
user) Jn\ module
Un\G
S K1
MOV S D to 3
D
K4
5 - 17
Project name QB-13
Program name MAIN
5.2.3 BCD (P) BIN → BCD data conversion instruction
K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
S D
X6
37 BCD T0 K2Y40
BCD C10 K4Y50
When the input condition is turned on, the data in the device specified in S is
recognized as a binary (BIN code), converted into a binary coded decimal
(BCD code), and transferred to the device specified in D .
163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
S side BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Must be set to "0". Converted into BCD.
8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

D side BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousand digits Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits
The ordinary digital displays display numbers in the BCD code. Therefore, the
BCD instruction is required for displaying data of the programmable controller
(current values of timers and counters, data resister values of operation
results).
16384
4096
8192
2048
1024
256
512
128
64
32
16
2
4
1024
128 C10
32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
16 (BIN)
8
4
+ 1
1213 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
(BCD)
Y5D
Y5C
Y5E
Y5B
Y5A
Y5F
Y59
Y58
Y57
Y56
Y55
Y54
Y53
Y52
Y51
Y50
K4Y50
8 4 2 1) 8 4 2) 1 8 4 2 1) 8 4 2) 1)
Digital display
5 - 18
Displayable Range with BCD Instruction
The displayable range of data with the BCD instruction (to be converted from
BIN into BCD) is between 0 and 9999. Any data which is outside the range
causes an error.
(Error code 4100: OPERATION ERROR)
To display a timer current value more than 9,999, use the DBCD instruction.
The instruction can handle 8-digit values (up to 99,999,999).
Programmable controller Output module
COM
Y4D
Y4C
Y4E
Y4B
Y4A
Y4F
Y53
Y52
Y51
Y50
Y49
Y48
Y47
Y46
Y45
Y44
Y43
Y42
Y41
Y40
80000
40000
20000
10000
8000
4000
2000
1000
800
400
200
100
80
40
20
10
8
4
2
1
Output power supply
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
K18000
X3
H
0 T5
SM400
(always on)
2 DBCD T5 K5Y40
Applicable device
Number of basic
MELSECNET/ Intelligent
Pointer
Level
steps
Internal device File Index
Digit
10 (H) Direct function Constant
(system or user) register register
Jn\ module
Un\G
S K1
BCD S D to 3
D
K4
5 - 19
Project name QEX8
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the BCD instruction works properly.
X0 K10
0 C0
BCD C0 K2Y40
X1
8 RST C0
Operating Procedure
Operation Practice
Check that turning on X0 on the control panel for several times displays the value of
C0 on the BCD digital displays of Y40 to Y47. Turning on X1 resets C0.
Y5C Y58 Y54 Y50 Y4C Y48 Y44 Y40

to Y5F to Y5B to Y57 to Y53 to Y4F to Y4B to Y47 to Y43
0 to 10
BCD digital display Displays the value of C0.
5 - 20
5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and transferring data
Program example Process

When the destination data D is a word device
X3X2X1X0
S D
K1X0 1 1 0 1
MOVP K1X0 D0
Becomes 0.
• Source: Source device
B15 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
• Destination: Destination device
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
When the source data S is a word device

B15 B8 B7 B0
S D
D0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
MOV D0 K2M100
M115 M108M107 M100
K2M100 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
No change
When the source data S is a constant

S D 1 2 3 4
MOV H1234 K2M0 H1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
M15 M8 M7 M0
K2M0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
No change 3 4
When the source data S is a bit device

M15 M8 M7 M4M3 M0
S D
K1M0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
MOV K1M0 K2M100
0
M115 M108 M107 M104 M103 M100
K2M100 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
No change Zero is Data of M3

transferred to M0 are
transferred.
5 - 21
Project name QB-14
Program name MAIN
5.2.5 FMOV (P) FMOV (Batch transfer of the same data)
BMOV (P) BMOV (Batch transfer of the block data)
S D n
X3
0 FMOVP K365 D0 K8
X4
5 FMOVP K7000 D8 K16
S D n
X5
10 BMOVP D0 D32 K16
X6
15 FMOVP K0 D0 K48
Operation Explanation
Input S D n
condition
FMOVP K365 D0 K8
FMOV
When the input condition is turned on, the FMOV instruction transfers the data in
the device specified in S to the devices starting from the device specified in D
(the number of target devices is specified by n ).
Example The FMOV instruction executes the following operation when X3 is

turned on.
D
365 D0
S
365 D1 n
K365 365
365 D2 8 devices (K8)
365 D7
The FMOV instruction is useful for clearing many data sets in batch.
Example
Input Input
Same
condition condition
FMOV K0 D0 K8 RST D0
RST D1
RST D7
The FMOV instruction can substitute the RST instructions as shown above.
5 - 22
Input S D n
condition
BMOVP D0 D32 K16
BMOV
When the input condition is turned on, the BMOV instruction transfers the data in
the devices starting from the device specified in S to the devices starting from
the device specified in D in batch (the numbers of source devices and target
devices are specified by n ).
Example The BMOV instruction executes the following operation when X5 is

turned on.
S D
D0 365 365 D32
D7 365 365 D39

D8 7000 7000 D40
D15 7000 7000 D47
The BMOV instruction is useful for the following:

• Filing logging data
• Saving important data (such as automatic operation data and measured data)
into the latch area. This can prevent a data loss caused by a power failure.
Applicable device
Number of basic
Intelligent
Pointer
Level
steps
Internal device File MELSECNET/10 Index
Digit
function Constant
(system or user) register (H) Direct Jn\ register
module
Un\G
(Note) (Note) (Note)
S K1
FMOV S D n
to 4
BMOV S D n D
K4
n
(Note) Not available in the BMOV instruction.
5 - 23
Operation Practice
Write the program on the previous page to the CPU, then run the CPU.
Follow the procedures below to execute the device batch monitoring. The
contents of D0 to D47 can be monitored.
Write the program to the programmable controller Click [Online] →
[Monitor] → [Device/Buffer Memory Batch].
Enter "D0" in the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor dialog box and press the
Enter key.
Click the Display Format button and select "Word Multi-point" for Monitor
Format.
→ Click the OK button.
[Monitor screen]
1) Turn on X3.
The numeric data 365 is
sent to eight registers of D0
to D7 in batch.
2) Turn on X4.
The numeric data 7000 is
sent to 16 registers of D8 to
D23 in batch.
3) Turn on X5.
The contents of the 16
registers of D0 to D15 are
sent to the 16 registers of
D32 to D47 in batch.
4) Turn on X6.
"0" is sent to the all 48
registers of D0 to D47 in
batch. This means that all
the 48 registers are cleared.
5 - 24
Reference
If D is a bit device, the operation becomes as follows;
FMOV instruction
Input S D n
condition
FMOV D0 K2Y40 K4
As D specifies
a two-digit number,
these data are S
ignored. D D
D0 (Example: when the content is 365)
Y4F Y48 Y47 Y40
0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
n
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 4 devices (K4)
D D
Y5F Y58 Y57 Y50
0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
Among the device of Y40 to Y5F, the devices specified as "1" are output first.
In the program shown below, turning on the input condition 1) turns on all the
outputs Y40 to Y5F and turning on the input condition 2) turns them off.
Input
condition 1)
FMOV K255 K2Y40 K4
Input Bit pattern of K255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
condition 2)
FMOV K0 K2Y40 K4
In units of four bits, to turn off;

16 bit devices or less MOV instruction Example MOV K0 K4M0
32 bit devices or less DMOV instruction Example DMOV K0 K8M0
More than 32 bit devices FMOV instruction Example FMOV K0 K4M0 K4

(Turns off 64 bit devices)
BMOV instruction
Input S D n
condition
As D specifies BMOV D0 K2Y40 K4
a two-digit number,
these data are
ignored.
D D
D0 3 0 5 1
Y4F Y48 Y47 Y40
D1 3 0 5 7 5 7 5 1
n
4 devices (K4)
D2 3 0 5 6 D D
Y5F Y58 Y57 Y50

D3 3 0 5 5 5 5 5 6
In the example above, the devices D0 to D3 store the product code (16 bits). The
BMOV instruction is useful for displaying and monitoring the last two digits
representing their types.
5 - 25
Project name QEX9
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the FMOV instruction works properly.
X0
0 FMOV K200 D0 K5
X1
5 FMOV K0 D0 K5
Operating Procedure
Operation Practice
Check that the contents of the devices of D0 to D4 become 200 on the batch
monitor screen by turning on X0 on the control panel of the demonstration machine.
Turning on X1 clears the data in the devices.
Change the setting of the device batch monitor as shown below to display the
numbers in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary notation.
Value: DEC ·····································displays numbers in decimal.
Value: HEX ·····································displays numbers in hexadecimal.
Monitor Format: Bit Multi-point ·······displays numbers in binary.
5 - 26
Project name QB-15
Program name MAIN
5.3 Comparison Operation Instruction
Size
comparison
K100
X3 SM413 (2-sec. clock)
0 C10
X4
6 BCD C10 K4Y40
S1 S2
10 > K10 C10 Y70
S1 S2
15 <= K10 C10 Y71
19 = K20 C10 Y72
23 <> K30 C10 Y73
27 > K20 C10 Y74
< K40 C10
34 <= K25 C10 >= K35 C10 Y75
41 <= K10 C10 >= K20 C10 Y76
<= K40 C10 > K50 C10
55 = K100 C10 RST C10

X0
The comparison operation instruction compares the data of source 1 ( S1 )and

source 2 ( S2 ), and brings the devices into conduction when the conditions are
met.
The instruction can be regarded as one normally open contact ( ) since it is
conducted only when the conditions are met.
K20 C10 Y74 Y74
K40 C10
● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 match.

● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 is smaller than source 2.
● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 is larger than source 2.
● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 match or
when source 1 is smaller than source 2.
● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 match or
when source 1 is larger than source 2.
● S1 S2 ······ Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 do not match.
5 - 27
Operation Practice
Write the program to the CPU.
Turn on X3 and X4.
C10 starts to count. (one count every two sec.) The current counter value is
displayed on the digital display (Y40 to Y4F).
Make sure that the devices Y70 to Y76 turn on as follows.
The range where Y70 to Y76 turn on
Y70
Y71
Y72
Output
Y73
Y74
Y75
Y76
012345 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Count (the current value of the counter C10)
> K50 C10 equals to 49.

Differences between > and > =
>= K50 C10 equals to 50.
The counter is designed to be reset every 200sec.

In this way, the comparison instruction does not only compare one data but
also specifies the range. This function is commonly used for the program to
judge the acceptances of products.
Applicable device
Number of basic
MELSECNET Intelligent
Pointer
Level
steps
Internal device File Index
Digit
/10 (H) Direct function Constant
(system or user) register register
Jn\ module
Un\G
S1 K1
Comparison S1 S2
instruction to 3
S2 K4
5 - 28
Project name QEX10
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
Read the following ladder and write it to the CPU of the demonstration machine.
Then check that the > and < instructions work properly.
0sec. ≤ T0 < 3sec. → Y70: ON, 2.7sec. < T0 < 3.3sec. →
Y71: ON, 3sec. < T0 ≤ 6sec. → Y72: ON
Y70:ON Y71:ON Y72:ON
T0:
0 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 6.0 sec.
X0
0 SET M0
M0 M10 K60
2 T0
T0
8 M10
10 > K30 T0 Y70
14 < K27 T0 > K33 T0 Y71
21 < K30 T0 Y72

SM400
25 BCD T0 K2Y40
X1
29 RST M0
Operating Procedure
(1) Reading data
Read the project data.
● Click on the toolbar.
Click
5 - 29
● The Open dialog box is displayed. Specify the save destination.
● Double-click the displayed workspace "SCHOOL".
Double-click
● Click "QEX10" and click the Open button.
Click
Click
5 - 30
Operation Practice
Turn on X0 and check that the program works properly.
X0
0 SET M0
M0 M10 K60
2 T0
30
T0
8 M10
10 K30 T0 Y70
30
14 K27 T0 K33 T0 Y71

30 30
21 K30 T0 Y72
30
SM400
25 BCD T0 K2Y40
30
X1
29 RST M0
31 END
5 - 31
5.4 Arithmetic Operation Instruction
Project name QB-16

Program name MAIN
5.4.1 +(P) BIN 16-bit data addition
-(P) BIN 16-bit data subtraction
S D
X2
0 +P K5 D0
1
S1 S2 D
X3
4 +P D0 K100 D1
2
1 ● Every time the input condition is turned on, the content of the device specified in
D is added to the content of the device specified in S and the result is stored in
D S D
D0 + (5) D0
→
(Input condition)
First ON 0 (example) + 5 → 5
Second ON 5 + 5 → 10
Third ON 10 + 5 → 15
The content of
D0 is changed.
2 ● When the input condition is turned on, the content of the device specified in S1 is
added to the content of the device specified in S2 and the result is stored in the
device specified in D .
S1 S2 D
D0 + (100) D1
→
(Input condition)
ON 15 (example) + 100 → 115
The content of D0 is not changed.
CAUTION
• +P or -P must be used for the addition or subtraction instructions.
• When + or - is used, an addition or subtraction operation is executed every
scanning. To use + or - , operands must be converted into pulse in advance.
X2 X2
+P K5 D0 PLS M0
M0
+ K5 D0
REFERENCE
• The following two instructions work on the same principle in the addition or subtraction
operation.
(Addition) +P K1 D0 INCP D0
(Subtraction) -P K1 D2 DECP D2
5 - 32
Project name QB-17
Program name MAIN
X4
0 MOVP K1000 D2
S D
X5
3 -P K10 D2
3
S1 S2 D
X6
7 -P D2 K50 D3
4
3 ● Every time the input condition is turned on, the content of the device specified in
S is subtracted from the device specified in D and the result is stored in the
D S D
D2 - (10) → D2
(Input condition)
First ON 1000 (example) - 10 → 990
Second ON 990 - 10 → 980
Third ON 980 - 10 → 970
The content of
D2 is changed.
subtracted from the content of the device specified in S1 and the result is stored
in the device specified in D .
S1 S2 D
D2 - (50) → D3
(Input condition)
ON 970 - 50 → 920
(Assumption)
The content of D2 is not changed.
Applicable device
Number of basic
Internal
MELSECNET/ Intelligent
Pointer
Level
steps
device File Index

Digit
10 (H) Direct function Constant

(system or register register
Jn\ module
user)
Un\G
S
Addition/subtraction S D K1
instruction S1 S2 3
Addition/subtraction S1 S2 to
instruction D 4
D K4
The number of basic steps is four for S1 S2 D .
5 - 33
Project name QEX11
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the addition and subtraction instructions
operate properly.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
+P D0 D1
X1
10 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
-P D0 D1
20 D1 K0 DBCD D1 K5Y40
26 D1 K0 Y70
DMOVK0 K5Y40
Operating Procedure
5 - 34
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 is turned on, the data in X30 to 3F and X20 to 2F are added, and the
result is output to Y40 to Y53.
(2) When X1 is turned on, the data in X30 to 3F is subtracted from the data in X20
to 2F, and the result is output to Y40 to Y53. When the result is a negative value,
Y70 is turned on and Y40 to Y53 are cleared to 0.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
300
BINP K4X20 D1
400
+P D0 D1
300 400
X1
10 BINP K4X30 D0
300
BINP K4X20 D1
400
-P D0 D1
300 400
20 >= D1 K0 DBCD D1 K5Y40
400 400
26 < D1 K0 Y70
400
DMOV K0 K5Y40
34 END
+ D0 D1 = D1+D0 D1
100+30 400
5 - 35
Project name QB-18
Program name MAIN
5.4.2 * (P) BIN 16-bit data multiplication
/ (P) BIN 16-bit data division
X0
0 MOVP K2000 D0
S1 S2 D
X2 1
3 *P K30 D0 D10
S1 S2 D
X3 2
7 /P D0 K600 D20
multiplied by the content of the device specified in S2 and the result is stored in
S1 S2 D
K30 D0 D11 D10
30 2000 = 60000
To store the result of 16-bit data × 16-bit data, This device is regarded as a 32-bit register to
16 bits (1 word) is not enough. hold the result. Left-most bit of D10 (B15) is
Therefore, D10 which is specified in the not a bit to determine positive and negative.
program and the next number D11 work as It is regarded as a part of the data.
the holder of the result.
The instructions must be regarded as 32 bits for programming with the calculation result of the
*(P) instruction. (such as the DMOV instruction and the DBCD instruction)
5 - 36
divided by the content of the device specified in S2 and the result is stored in the
S1 S2 D
D0 K600 D20 D21
2000 600 = 3 200
Quotient Remainder
and
The quotient is stored to D20, which is The remainder is stored to D21, which
specified in the program. is the next device number.
Values after the decimal point of the operation result are ignored.
● When a bit device is specified in D , the quotient is stored, but the remainder is
not stored.
● The following shows examples for processing negative values.
Example -5 / (-3) = 1, remainder: -2
5 / (-3) = -1, remainder: 2
● The following shows examples for dividing a number by 0, or dividing 0 by a
number.
Example 0/0
Error "OPERATION ERROR"
1/0
0 / 1, Both quotient and remainder are 0.
Operation Practice
● Write the program to the CPU and run it.
● Turn on X0 and store "2000" (BIN value) in D0.
● Turn on X2. The following operation is executed.
If "60000" (operation result of D11 and D10 is regarded as a 16-bit
integral number and only D10 is monitored, "-5536" is displayed. To prevent this,
follow the procedures in the following pages.
S1 S2 D
K30 D0 = D11 D10

(30) (2000) (60000)
● Turn on X3.
S1 S2 D
D0 K600 = D21 D20
(2000) (600) (200) (3)
Remainder Quotient
Applicable device
Number of basic

Pointer
Level
steps
Digit
File Index
(system or 10 (H) Direct function Constant
register register
user) Jn\ module
S1 K1
Multiplication/division S1 S2 *
instruction D S2 to
4
D K4
The number of basic steps for the multiplication instruction is three or four, and that for division instruction is four.
*: The multiplication instruction varies depending on the device to be used.
5 - 37
● How to monitor 32-bit integral number data
When the operation result of the multiplication instruction is outside the range from 0 to 32,767, the
result cannot be displayed properly even though the number is regarded as 16-bit integral number and
the contents of the lower register are monitored in ladder.
To monitor those numbers properly, follow the procedures below.
• Click the Display Format button on the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor dialog box and
select "32bit Integer" of "Display".
Click the OK button.
• The data is monitored properly.
5 - 38
Project name QEX12
Program name MAIN
Ladder example
demonstration machine. Then check that the multiplication and division instructions
operate properly.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
*P D0 D1 D10
DBCDP D10 K8Y40

X1
13 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
/P D0 D1 D20
BCDP D20 K4Y50
BCDP D21 K4Y40
Operating Procedure
5 - 39
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 is turned on, the data in X20 to X2F is multiplied by the data in X30 to
3F, and the result is output to Y40 to 5F.
(2) When X1 is turned on, the data in X30 to X3F is divided by the data in X20 to 2F.
The quotient is output to Y50 to 5F, and the remainder is output to Y40 to 4F.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
6
BINP K4X20 D1
3
*P D0 D1 D10
6 3 18
DBCDP D10 K8Y40

18
X1
13 BINP K4X30 D0
6
BINP K4X20 D1
3
/P D0 D1 D20
6 3 0
BCDP D20 K4Y50

0
BCDP D21 K4Y40

0
30 END
D0 D1=D10
6 3=18
Related Exercise ---- Exercise 10, Exercise 11
5 - 40
5.4.3 32-bit data instructions and their necessity
The minimum unit in the data memory of the Q-series programmable controller is
1 word which consists of 16 bits. Therefore, in general, data is processed in
1-word basis at the transfer, comparison, and arithmetic operation.
The Q-series programmable controller can process data in 2-word (32-bit) basis.
In that case, "D" is added at the head of each instruction to indicate that the
instruction is regarded as 2-word. The following shows the examples.
Data 1 word 2 words

Instruction 16 bits 32 bits
MOV(P) DMOV(P)
Transfer BIN(P) DBIN(P)
BCD(P) DBCD(P)
<, >, <= D<, D>, D<=
Comparison
>=, =, <> D>=, D=, D<>
+ (P) D + (P)
Arithmetic - (P) D - (P)
operations * (P) D * (P)
/(P) D/(P)
-32,768 0 -2,147,483,648
to to to
32,767 9,999 2,147,483,647
Available range for Values in parentheses are for 0
values BIN(P), BCD(P) instructions. to
99,999,999
Values in parentheses are for
DBIN(P), DBCD(P) instructions.
Available range for
K1 to K4 K1 to K8
digits
The bit weights of the 32-bit configuration are as follows:

B31 B16 B15 B0
-2147483648
67108864
33554432
16777216
8388608
4194304
2097152
1048576
131072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
524288
262144
64
32
16
1073741824
536870912
268435456
134217728
8
4
2
1
As the case of 16-bit data processing, the programmable controller processes a 32-bit
negative value in two's complement. Therefore, the most significant bit B31 (B15 for 16-bit
data), is a sign bit.
B31 B0 Available range for numbers
-2147483648 to 0 to 2147483647
When the bit is 0, the number is interpreted as a positive number.

Most significant bit
When the bit is 1, the number is interpreted as a negative number.
(Sign bit)
5 - 41
Whether the data is processed in 2-word (32-bit) basis or not depends on the
size of the data.
In the following cases, 2-word instructions must be used.
1) When the data size exceeds the range (-32768 to 32767) in which data can
be processed as 1-word
S D
DMOV K50000 D0
D1 D0 Stored in two
adjacent devices.
50,000 50000
Transferred
2) When the result of the 16-bit multiplication instruction (1-word instruction) is

transferred
S1 S2 D
* D0 D1 D10
D0 D1 D11 D10 The multiplication

result is stored in
two adjacent devices.
DBCD D10 K8Y40

8-digit display 0 to 99,999,999)
D11 D10
Converted
into BCD.
*: The result of the 32-bit data multiplication is 64 bits.
3) When the result of 32-bit division instruction is used
D/ D20 D30 D40
D21 D20 D31 D30 D41 D40

(Quotient)
D43 D42
(Remainder)
DBCD D40 K8Y40 Displays a quotient.
DBCD D42 K8Y60 Displays a remainder.
5 - 42
Project name QB-19
Program name MAIN
5.4.4 Calculation examples for multiplication and division including decimal points (when the multiplication
or division is used)
Example 1 Calculation example to determine a circumference
Digitalswitch value × 3.14 → Integral part and Decimal part

(K4X30) (Circular constant) (K8Y50) (K2Y48)
• Programming method
Handle the circular constant as 314 (3.14 × 100), and divide the result by 100
afterward.
Example 2 Calculation example to handle values after decimal point (division

example)
Digitalswitch value / 0.006 → Quotient and Remainder

(K4X30) (K8Y50) (K4Y40)
• Programming method
To handle 0.006 as an integer 6, multiply both the dividend and divisor by 1000.
The calculation of X0 X1
Example1 is BINP K4X30 D0 Imports the set value of the digital switch into D0.
commanded.
*P D0 K314 D1 D0 314 D2 D1
D/P D1 K100 D10 D2 D1 100 D11 D10 D13 D12

Quotient Remainder
(Decimal part)
DBCD D10 K8Y50 Displays the integral part (quotient).
BCD D12 K2Y48 Displays the decimal part (remainder).
MOV K0 K2Y40
The calculation of X1 X0
Example2 is BINP K4X30 D20 Imports the set value of the digital switch into D20.
commanded.
*P D20 K1000 D21 D20 1000 D22 D21
D/P D21 K6 D30 D22 D21 6 D31 D30 D33 D32

Quotient Remainder
DBCD D30 K8Y50 Displays a quotient.
BCD D32 K4Y40 Displays a remainder.
REMARK
QCPU has instructions which can process actual number (floating decimal
point) operation data for highly accurate operations.
As long as the instructions are used, careful attentions for the place of the
decimal point as shown above are unnecessary.
5 - 43
5.5 Index Register and File Register
5.5.1 How to use index register Z
The index register (Zn) is used to indirectly specify the device number. The
result of an addition of data in the index register and the directly specified device
number can be specified as the device number.
Example
D0Z0 → Can be interpreted as D (0+Z0)

Device number
For example, when Z0 is 0, the device number becomes D0.
when Z0 is 50, the device number becomes D50.
Z0 to Z19 can be used as the index register.

The index register (Zn) is a word device which consists of 16 bits. Therefore, the
available data size range is -32768 to +32767.
The following devices can be used for the indexing.
Bit device ········ X, Y, M, L, S, B, F, Jn\X, Jn\Y, Jn\B, Jn\SB (such as K4Y40Z0)
(Note) (Note)
Word device···· T ,C , D, R, W, Jn\W, Jn\SW, Jn\G (such as D0Z0)
Constant ········· K, H (such as K100Z0)
Pointer ············ P
(Note) Only the current value can be used for timer and counter.
The following restrictions are provided for using the index register for contact or
coil.
Device Description Application example
• Only Z0 and Z1 are available for a T0Z0
K100
T contact and coil of a timer. T1Z1
• Only Z0 and Z1 are available for a C0Z1

K100
C contact and coil of a counter. C1Z0
REMARK
When the index register is used with 32-bit data instructions
Zn and Zn+1 are targets to be processed.
The lower 16 bits correspond to the specified index register number (Zn), and the
higher 16 bits correspond to the specified index register number + 1.
32-bit indexing
(Only for Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJCPU))
A method for specifying index registers for 32-bit indexing can be selected from
following two methods.
● Specifying the index range used for 32-bit indexing
● Specifying the 32-bit indexing using "ZZ" specification
Refer to appendix 8 for the detail of indexing.
5 - 44
Application Example
• Write the data to the data register with number which is specified with the digital
switch.
Project name Index register

Program name MAIN
K3000
T2
0 T2
X0
5 BINP K2X20 Z0
MOVP T2 D0Z0
• Check the operation of the ladder executing the device batch monitoring.
The operation procedure is the same as the one in section 5.2.1.
Set any two-digit number in the digital switch column (X27 to X20) and turn on
X0.
5 0
X27 to X20
Z0= 50
D0Z0=D50
The current value of T2 is

transferred to D50.
5 - 45
5.5.2 How to use file register R
The file register (R) consists of 16 bits as well as the data register (D).
Set the file register in the standard RAM of the QCPU or a memory card (SRAM
card and Flash card). The file register to be stored in the Flash card can be read
from the program only. The data cannot be changed with the program.
Stores parameters, programs, device
Program memory comments, and device initial values.
(File registers cannot be stored.)
Stores file registers of 1K to 640K

Standard RAM (the capacity depends on the CPU type).
Stores parameters, programs, device

Standard ROM comments, and device initial values.
(File registers cannot be stored.)
Stores file registers of 1K to 4086K.

Memory card (The maximum number of storable file
registers depends on the memory card to be used.)
The data in the file register remains after the reset operation or after the power is
turned off.
To clear the data, write 0 to the file register with the MOV(P) instruction or GX
Works2.
Use [Write to PLC] of GX Works2 or a sequence program to write data to the
standard RAM or SRAM card.
Use [Export to ROM Format] of GX Works 2 to copy data in the standard ROM
or Flash card.
Specify the area of the file register in 1K (1024 point) basis with the parameter.
Application Example
• Set 32K points of the file register R0 to R32767 to use in the program.
Follow the procedures below to register the file register to the parameter.
1) Double-click "Parameter" in the project list.
1) Double-click!
2) "PLC Parameter", "Network Parameter", and

"Remote Password" are displayed.
2) Double-click!
Double-click "PLC Parameter"
(To the next page)
5 - 46
3) The Q Parameter Setting dialog box is

displayed. Click the PLC File tab.
3) Click!
4) Check the "Use the following file" check box

and select "Memory Card (RAM) (Drive 1)"
for "Corresponding Memory".
Enter the following items in "File Name" and

4) Select! "Capacity".
[Setting contents]
File Name :R
Capacity : 32
5) After the setting is completed, click the

End button.
5) Click!

the Yes button.
6) Click!
(To the next page)
5 - 47
7) Click [Online] → [Write to PLC] to display the

Online Data Operation dialog box. Select
"Parameter" in the PLC Module tab.
7) Select!
8) Click the Execute button to write the
data.
8) Click!
• To clear the file register data with the program, write the following program.
For the operation procedure, refer to section 4.4.
Turning on X0 can write the data, and turning on X1 can clear the data.
Project name File register

Program name MAIN
X0
0 MOV K173 R5
X1 The file register data of the standard RAM

3 MOV K0 R5 is kept by the battery.
Resetting or turning off the power cannot
clear the data. To clear the data, write "0".
X0
6 MOV K173 D5 For comparison
5 - 48
5.6 External Setting of Timer/Counter Set Value and External Display of Current Value
The timer and counter can be specified by K (decimal constant) directly or by D

(data register) indirectly. In the program shown below, the external digital switch can
change the set value.
Project name QTC

Program name MAIN
X0 Digital switch
0 BINP K4X20 D5 X2F to X20
D5 1 2 3 4
X4
4 T10
T10 D5 1 2 3 4
9 Y70 D5
SM400 T10
11 BCD T10 K4Y40
X1
Digital display
15 BINP K4X30 D6
Y4F to Y40
D6
X5
19 C10
Displays the current
value of T10.
C10
24 Y71
X6
26 RST C10
SM400
31 BCD C10 K4Y50
• After reading the program to GX Works2, write it to the programmable controller to

check that it works properly.
Operating Procedure
The step (1) of the following procedure is the same as Operating Procedure in
section 5.3.
The steps (2) to (4) of the following procedure are the same as Operating Procedure
in section 4.4.
(1) Reading the data
5 - 49
Operation Practice
(1) External setting of the timer set value and display of the current value
• Set the timer set value in the digital switch (X20 to 2F), and turn on the switch
X0.
• When the switch X4 is turned on, Y70 turns on after the time specified with
the digital switch. (For example, Y70 turns on after 123.4sec.
when 1 2 3 4 is set.)
• The digital display (Y40 to 4F) displays the current value of the timer T10.
(2) External setting of the counter set value and display of the current value
• Set the counter set value in the digital switch (X30 to 3F), and turn on the
switch X1.
• Turn on and off the switch X5 repeatedly. When X5 has turned on for the
times specified with the digital switch (count up), Y71 turns on.
• The digital display (Y50 to 5F) displays the current value of the counter C10
(the number of times that X5 is turned on).
• Turning on the switch X6 clears the counter C10 to 0. When the contact C10
is already turned on (count up), the contact is released.
5 - 50
Project name QTEST5
Program name MAIN
5.7 Exercise
5.7.1 Exercise 1 MOV
Transfer the eight input statuses (X0 to X7) to D0 once then output them to Y70 to
Y77. (For example, Y70 turns on when X0 turns on.)
X0 Y70
X1 Y71
X2 Y72
X3 Y73
X4 Y74
X5 Y75
X6 Y76
X7 Y77
Create the following program with GX Works2 filling in the blanks .

Then, check the operation using the demonstration machine.
SM401
0 MOV 1) D0
MOV D0 2)
Hint
CPU
(Input module) (Output module) 1)
D0
2)
X0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y70
X1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y71
X2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y72
X3 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y73
K2X0 K2Y70
X4 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y74
X5 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y75
X6 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y76
X7 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y77
MOV MOV The CPU imports the input signal as "1" when it is on,
and imports as "0" when it is off.
The output module turns on when the CPU outputs "1",
and turns off when the CPU outputs "0".
Comparison
The following shows a program which is created with the sequence instructions, not
with the MOV instruction.
X0
0 Y70
X1
2 Y71
X2
4 Y72
X3
6 Y73
X4
8 Y74
X5
10 Y75
X6
12 Y76
X7
14 Y77
5 - 51
Project name QTEST6
Program name MAIN
5.7.2 Exercise 2 BIN and BCD conversion
Output the number of times that X1 is turned on on the display connected to Y40 to
Y4F in BCD. As a precondition, the set value of the counter (C0) can be input with
the digital switch (X20 to X2F) and the setting will be available by turning on X0.

X1 1)
0 C0
X0
5 BINP 2) D0
SM401
9 3) C0 4)
X2
13 RST C0
C0
18 Y70
Hint
CPU
BCD value BIN value
BIN D0
BCD digital switch

X20 to X2F (K4X20)
Set
value
BCD value
C0 BCD
X1:ON/OFF
BIN value BCD digital display
Y40 to Y4F (K4Y40)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5 - 52
Project name QTEST7
Program name MAIN
5.7.3 Exercise 3 FMOV
Create a program in which turning on X0 turns on the 64 outputs Y40 to Y7F and
turning off X0 turns off the 64 outputs Y40 to Y7F.

X0
0 FMOV K255 1) 2)
X0
5 FMOV 3) K2Y40 K8
Hint
CPU The constant is output from the CPU in the binary notation.
(Output card)
255
1 Y40 When 255 is output from Y40,
1
Y41 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
1
1 Y42 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 =1+2+4+8+16+32+64+128=255
1 Y43
1 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
1 Y44
1 Y45 In this exercise, a 64-point output module is used (Y40 to Y7F).
How many blocks are required for 255 on the output basis?
Y46
Y47
MOV
1)
2)
3)
Comparison
The following shows a program which is created with the sequence instructions, not
with the FMOV instruction. The 130 steps are used.
X0
0 Y40
Y41
Y42
Y7F
5 - 53
Project name QTEST8
Program name MAIN
5.7.4 Exercise 4 Comparison instruction
Using the two BCD digital switches, execute the calculation of (A - B) and display
the result on the BCD digital display (Y40 to Y4F).
(X30 to X3F) (X20 to X2F) (Y40 to Y4F)

A B Displays the result of the calculation of A - B
on the BCD display of Y40 to Y4F.
When the result is a negative number, make sure that
the display displays 0 and the LED of Y70 turns on.
Fill in the blanks .

X0
0 1) K4X20 D0
2) K4X30 D1
-P D0 D1
3) K0 D1 SET Y70
MOV K0 K4Y40
4) K0 D1 BCD D1 K4Y40
RST Y70
Hint
The operation result is always output from the CPU in binary.
- D0 D1 =D1-D0 D1
1)
2)
3)
4)
5 - 54
Project name QTEST9
Program name MAIN
5.7.5 Exercise 5 Addition and subtraction instructions
Create a program that:

1) Imports the values specified by the digital switches (X20 to X2F) to D3 and D2
(32-bit data) when X0 is turned on, adds them to D1 and D0, and displays the
result on the displays (Y40 to Y5F).
2) Imports the values specified by the digital switches (X20 to X2F) to D5 and D4
when X1 is turned on, subtracts them from D1 and D0, and displays the result.
3) When the result is a negative number, Y77 is turned on, the two's complement is
determined from the result to obtain the absolute value, and displayed.
Fill in the blanks in the following.
X0
0 DBIN K4X20 D2 Adds the external
set value to D0.
1) D2 D0
9 D<= K0 D0 DBCD D0 K8Y40 Displays the result when

it is a positive number.
X1
17 DBIN K4X20 D4
Subtracts the external
2) D4 D0 set value from D0.
X0
26 PLS M1
X1
M1 When the result is a

30 D> K0 D0 DCML D0 D8 negative number, it is
converted into a positive
D+P K1 D8 number and displayed.
(The negative absolute
DBCD D8 K8Y40 value is determined.)
Y77 Outputs that the number
X7 is negative.
50 DMOV K0 D0 Clears D0 and D1.
1)
2)
Reference
Complement (deny transfer)
M1 D1 D0
D> K0 D0 DCML D0 D8 Before DCML B31 B30 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B2 B1 B0
execution
(negative number) 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
D+P K1 D8
D9 D8
The absolute value is determined After DCML
by a calculation of two's complement execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
of D0 and D1 (32-bit data).
D9 D8
After D + P execution
(absolute value) 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
REMARK
The CML instruction inverts the bit pattern of S and transfers the data to D
when the input condition is turned on.
Input condition S D
CML D0 D10
5 - 55
Project name QTEST10
Program name MAIN
5.7.6 Exercise 6 Multiplication and division instructions

1) Sets data for multiplication and division when X0 is turned on.
2) Multiplies the value specified by the digital switches X20 to X27 by the value
specified by the digital switches X30 to X37 in binary when X2 is turned on.
3) Divides the value specified by the digital switches X30 to X37 by the value
specified by the digital switches X20 to X27 in binary when X3 is turned on.
4) Outputs the result of the multiplication or division to the BCD displays Y40 to Y4F
and the remainder to the BCD displays Y60 to Y67.
(X30 to X37) × (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F)
(X30 to X37) / (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F) ... (Y60 to Y67)
Create the program with GX Works2 filling in the blanks in the following.
X0
0 >= H9 K1X30 >= H9 K1X34 1) K2X30 D0
>= H9 K1X20 >= H9 K1X24 2) K2X20 D1

X2 X3
21 3) D0 D1 D2
X3 X2
26 <> D1 K0 4) D0 D1 D2
= D1 K0 DMOVP K0 D2
SM401
43 >= K9999 D2 5) D2 K4Y40
>= K99 D3 6) D3 K2Y60
Hint
D0 D1 D3 D2
BIN-
multiplication BIN value BIN value 0 BIN value
D0 D1 D2 D3
BIN-division BIN value BIN value BIN value BIN value
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
5 - 56
Project name QTEST11
Program name MAIN
5.7.7 Exercise 7 D-multiplication and D-division

1) Multiplies the value set by the 5-digit digital switches (X20 to X33) by 1,100 in
binary when X2 is turned on. When the result is 99,999,999 or less, it is
displayed on the displays (Y40 to Y5F).
2) Divides the value set by the 8-digit digital switches (X20 to X3F) by 40,000 in
binary when X3 is turned on. When X4 is on, the quotient is displayed on the
displays (Y40 to Y5F). When X4 is off, the remainder is displayed on the displays
(Y40 to Y5F).
(X20 to X33) × 1100 (Y40 to Y5F)
Quotient (Y40 to Y5F) ... X4: ON
(X20 to X3F) / 40000
Remainder (Y40 to Y5F) ... X4: OFF
Create the program with GX Works2 filling in the blanks in the following. Then,
X2 X3
0 DBINP K5X20 D0
1) K1100 D2
2) D0 D2 D4
D< K99999999 D4 Y77

Y77
DBCDP D4 K8Y40
X3 X2
24 3) K8X20 D10
4) K40000 D12
5) D10 D12 D14

X4
DBCD 6) K8Y40
X4
DBCD 7) K8Y40
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
5 - 57
Answers for the exercises in Chapter 5
Exercise
Answer
No.
1) K2X0
1
2) K2Y70
1) D0
2) K4X20
2
3) BCD
4) K4Y40
1) K2Y40
3 2) K8
3) K0
1) BINP
2) BINP
4
3) >
4) <=
1) D+P
5
2) D-P
1) BINP
2) BINP
3) *P
6
4) /P
5) BCD
6) BCD
1) DMOVP
2) D*P
3) DBINP
7 4) DMOVP
5) D/P
6) D14
7) D16
5 - 58
CHAPTER 6 HOW TO USE OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.1 Test Function at Online
As a preparation, follow the procedure below.
Project name QEX14

Program name MAIN
X6 X1
0 Y70 For details on the operation method, refer to
Y70 chapter 2.
X4 M10 K1500 1) Read a project with GX Works2.

4 TO
0
BCD TO K4Y50 2) Write the parameter and program of the read
0
X6 T1 project to the CPU (programmable controller).
13 Y74
(The CPU must be stopped.)
Y74
Y74 X6 K30 3) Set GX Works2 to the monitor mode.

17 T1
0
23 END 4) Confirm the program displayed on the screen.
6-1
6.1.1 Turning on and off the device "Y" forcibly
Stop the CPU before this operation.
1) Click [Debug] → [Modify Value].
1) Click!
2) Enter "Y70"!
2) The Modify Value dialog box is displayed.
Enter "Y70" in the "Device/Label" list box.
3) Click the ON or OFF button to turn

on or off "Y70" forcibly.
3) Click!
Check with demonstration machine

1) Confirm that the on and off statuses on the Execution Result area switches
according to the clicking of the ON or OFF button. Also, confirm that
the LED of Y70 on the demonstration machine turns on and off according to the
operation.
NOTE
When the CPU is in the RUN state, the operation results of programs are
displayed preferentially. Therefore, stop the CPU first before the confirmation
with the demonstration machine.
6-2
POINT
The test function during ladder monitoring of GX Works2 is also available for
setting and resetting contacts, changing current values, and outputting forcibly
word devices.
Double-clicking a contact (pressing the Enter key) holding the Shift
key in the ladder monitoring screen of GX Works2 switches the contact open or
close forcibly.
To display the Modify Value dialog box, double-click a word device (press the
Enter key) holding the Shift key in the ladder monitoring screen of GX
Works2.
6-3
6.1.2 Setting and resetting the device "M"
Activate the CPU before this operation.
1) Click!

2) Enter "M10"! Enter "M10" in the "Device/Label" list box.
3) Click the ON or OFF button to set or

reset "M10".
3) Click!

Turn off X4 and check the following.
M10
1) When M10 is set, becomes non-conductive and the current value
X4 M10 K1500 of the timer T0 is cleared to 0.
4 T0
K4 Check that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) does not change.
BCD T0 Y50 M10
2) When M10 is reset, is conducted and the timer T0 starts counting
from 0. This count value increases every 10 seconds.
Confirm that the value on the display (Y50-Y5F) increases every 10
(Monitor screen when M10 is set)
seconds.
POINT
With the same procedure, bit devices other than the internal relay (M) also can
be set or reset forcibly.
6-4
6.1.3 Changing the current value of the device "T"
1) Click!

2) Enter "T0"! Enter "T0" in the "Device/Label" list box.
3) Select "Word[Signed]" from the "Data Type"

3) Select!
list box.
4) Enter "1000"!
4) Enter "1000" in the "Value" column.

5) Click!
Set button to change the current value of
T0 to 1000 forcibly.

1) Confirm that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) is 1000 when the
key is pressed.
POINT
With the same procedure, the current values of word devices other than the
timer (T) also can be changed.
6-5
6.1.4 Reading error steps
1) Click!
2) The PLC Diagnostics dialog box is displayed.

Click the Error JUMP button to jump to the
highlighted sequence program step number
where the selected error occurred.
• An error number is displayed if an error occurred.
2) Jump to the step number • "No Error" is displayed if no error occurred.

with the error!
6-6
6.1.5 Remote STOP and RUN
1) Click [Online] → [Remote Operation].
1) Click!
2) The Remote Operation dialog box is

displayed. Select "STOP" from the list in the
Operation area.

Execute button.
2) Select!
3) Click!
4) The message "Do you want to execute the

operation(STOP)?" is displayed. Click the
Yes button.
The operation of the CPU stops.

4) Click!
5) Select "RUN" in step 2), and perform steps

2) to 4) again.
The CPU, which was stopped in the above

operation, starts the operation again.
6-7
6.2 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings
1) Double-click!
2) Double-click! 2) "PLC Parameter", the "Network Parameter"

folder, and "Remote Password" are
displayed. Double-click the "PLC
Parameter".

displayed. Click the "I/O Assignment" tab.
3) Click!
4) Select "Input" from the list box of the "Type"

column.
5) Enter "QX42" in the "Model Name" column.
6) Select "32Points" from the list box of "Points"
column.
7) Enter "0000" in the "Start XY" column.
End button.
4) Select! 6) Select!
After this exercise is finished, initialize the
5) Enter "QX42"! 7) Enter "0000"!
settings by the following procedure.
1) Click the Default button in the Q
Parameter Setting dialog box to initialize the
parameter settings.
8) Click! 2) Click on the toolbar and write only the
parameters to the CPU.
6-8
Stop the CPU and click on the toolbar.
The Online Data Operation dialog box is displayed. Click the parameter of the
currently edited data, and click the Execute button to write only the parameters
to the CPU. Then, activate the CPU and check the following.
1) The current value of the timer T0 disappears from the digital display (Y50 to Y5F).
Then, the LEDs of Y70 to Y77 start flashing until the set values of Y70 to Y77
reach each set device value.
2) Turning on X6 to output the signal to Y70 and Y74 does not turn the LEDs of Y70
and Y74.
[I/O numbers before the forced assignment]

[Slot 0] [Slot 1]
Address 0, Address 2, Address 4, Address 6, Sixteen points occupy one address.
Address 1, Address 3 Address 5, Address 7 Sixty-four points occupy four addresses.
QX42 QY42P Digital display
Address Address
Q61P 0 4
Q06 Vacant
Power UD(E)H slot Address Address
supply CPU 1 5 [BCD T0 K4Y50]
module Y5F-Y50
Address Address Name plate
2 6
Address Address
3 7
Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Name plate
[I/O numbers after the forced assignment]

X is set to 32 points, therefore only two addresses are available.
Hereafter, the addresses become smaller by two.
Address 0 Address 4, Address 6,
Address 1 Address 5, Address 7 Digital display
QX42 QY42P
Address Address
Q61P 0 2
Q06 Vacant
Power
UD(E)H slot Address Address
supply 1 3
CPU Y5F-Y50
module
Address Name plate
4 [BCD T0 K4Y50]
Address
5
Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Name plate
POINT
• The address 7 is replaced with the address 5. Therefore, the current value of
the timer T0 is output to the newly assigned address 5, and LEDs of Y70 to
Y77 which are connected to the address 5 flash.
• Results of outputting the signals to Y70 or Y74 are not displayed on any
displays since the address 7 of the output modules no longer exists.
• To display the device numbers normally, change the device number K4Y50
K4Y30, and Y70 to Y77 Y50 to Y57.
6-9
6.3 How to Use Retentive Timers
When an input condition is turned on, the coil is energized. Then the value of a
retentive timer starts increasing. When the current value reaches the set value, the
retentive timer goes time-out and the contact turns on. When the input condition is
turned off during the increasing, the coil is de-energized but the current value is kept.
When the input condition is turned on again, the coil is re-energized and the current
value is accumulated.
Project name Retentive timer
Program name MAIN
Contact X6
X6 K50
ST1
Coil ST1
ST1
Y73 3.0sec. 2.0sec.
Normally open contact ST1
X7
RST ST1
Contact X7 (for input RST instruction)
Current
0 3 3 5 5 0
value of ST1
When using the program as a Only the RST instruction is available for turning off the contact
retentive timer, specify the points and clearing the current value after the retentive timer goes time-out.
in parameters in advance.
In the example below, the retentive timer is set to ST0 to ST31.
1) Double-click!
2) "PLC Parameter", the "Network Parameter"

folder, and "Remote Password" are displayed.
2) Double-click! Double-click the "PLC Parameter".
(To the next page)
6 - 10

displayed. Click the "Device" tab.
3) Click!
4) Click "Device Points" in the "Retentive Timer"

row, and enter "32".

End button.
4) Enter "32"!
5) Click!
6 - 11
6.4 Device Batch Replacement
6.4.1 Batch replacement of device numbers
This section explains how to replace Y40 to Y7F (64 devices) with Y20 to Y5F
(64 devices) in batch.
1) Click [Find/Replace] → [Device Batch Replace].
1) Click!
2) The Find/Replace dialog box is displayed.

Enter "Y40" in the "Find Device" column.
3) Enter "Y20" in the "Replace Device" column.
2) Enter "Y40"! 3) Enter "Y20"! 4) Enter "64"!

4) Enter "64" in the "Points" column.

Execute button.
5) Click!
(Before) (After)
X6 X1 X6 X1
6) Confirm that the target device numbers are
0 Y70 0 Y50
Y70 Y50 replaced.
X4 M10 K1500 X4 M10 K1500
4 T0 4 T0
BCD TO K4Y50 BCD TO K4Y30
X6 T1 X6 T1
13 Y74 13 Y54
Y74 Y54
Y74 X6 K30 Y54 X6 K30
17 T1 17 T1
6 - 12
6.4.2 Batch change of specified devices between normally open contacts and normally closed contacts
This section explains how to change the normally open contacts of the specified
devices to the normally closed contact and vice versa in batch.
1) Click [Find/Replace] → [Change Open/Close

Contact].
1) Click!
2) The Find/Replace dialog box is displayed.

Enter "X4" in the "Replace Device" list box.

2) Enter "X4"!
All Replace button.
3) Click!
(Before) (After) 4) Confirm that the normally open contact is

X6 X1 X6 X1
0
Y50
Y50 0
Y50
Y50 changed to the normally closed contact and
4
X4 M10 K1500
T0 4
X4 M10 K1500
T0 vice versa.
BCD TO K4Y30 BCD TO K4Y30
X6 T1 X6 T1
13 Y54 13 Y54
Y54 Y54
Y54 X6 K30 Y54 X6 K30

17 T1 17 T1
NOTE
Before exercising section 6.5 after this section, write the program in the
personal computer to the CPU.
For the write operation, refer to section 2.7.
6 - 13
6.5 Online Program Change
This function is used to write programs to the CPU that is running.
1) Change the ladder!

1) Change the ladder.
(In the example, change "X1" to "X0".)
2) After the change, click [Compile]

→ [Online Program Change].
2) Click!
3) The dialog box for "Caution" is displayed.

Click the Yes button to accept the
change.
3) Click!
4) The message "Online change has

completed." is displayed. Click the OK
4) Click! button.
NOTE
Online program change cannot be executed when the program in the
programmable controller CPU and the program in GX Works2 before the
modification do not match. Therefore, when whether the programs match or not
is unclear, verify them before the modification with GX Works2, and execute the
online program change.
6 - 14
6.6 Registering Devices
This section explains how to register multiple devices or labels in one screen and to
monitor them at the same time.
1) Click [View] → [Docking Window]

→ [Watch(1 to 4)].
* In this example, select "1".
1) Click!
2) The Watch 1 window is displayed. Select a

row to be edited. Enter "T0" in the Device
Label column.
2) Enter "T0"!
3) The input device or label is registered.
4) Click [Online] → [Watch] → [Start Watching].
The current value of the registered device or

label is displayed in the window.
4) Displayed!
6 - 15
6.7 How to Create Comments
Project name QEX15

Program name MAIN
The following is an example of a printed out ladder with comments.
Use the keyboard to input the program above or read it from a folder on the desktop.
6 - 16
(1) Flowchart of when creating comments
Set the device range on which comments are attached.*
Double-click the comment file on the workspace.
Create comments.
When attaching comments to other devices
Save the project.
Read and confirm the ladder with comments
*: This procedure is necessary for specifying the device comment range.
POINT
Comments are used for displaying functions or applications of each device.
Up to 32 characters are available.
6 - 17
(2) Creating comments
1) Double-click "Global Device Comment" in the

project list. The Device Comment screen is
displayed.
1) Double-click!
2) Click a comment area and enter a comment

2) Enter comments!
3) Enter "Y70" in the "Device Name" list box.

3) Enter "Y70"!
4) Press the Enter key.

5) Enter comments!
(To the next page)
6 - 18
6) Enter "M1" in the "Device Name" list box.

6) Enter "M1"!

8) Enter comments!
as shown left.
9) Enter "T0" in the "Device Name" list box.

9) Enter "T0"!
11) Enter comments!

as shown left.
12) Enter "C2" in the "Device name" list box.

12) Enter "C2"!

14) Enter comments!
as shown left.
6 - 19
(3) Saving comments
1) Click [Project] → [Save As].
1) Click!
2) The Save As dialog box is displayed.

Specify (or select) a workspace name and
click the Save button.
2) Click!
6 - 20
(4) Displaying a ladder with comments on GX Works2 screens
1) Click [View] → [Comment].
1) Click!
2) Comments are displayed on the ladder screen.
6 - 21
POINT
In addition to device comments, statements and notes can be created on the ladder screen.
• Statement : Comment for explaining functions or applications for the ladder block. Up to 64
characters are available.
• Note : Comment for explaining functions or applications for outputs and commands. Up to 32
characters are available.
Statement
Note
• Creating statements
Click and double-click a symbol where a comment is to be attached.
The Enter Line Statements dialog box is displayed. Enter a comment and click the OK button.
• Creating notes
Click and double-click an output or a command where a comment is to be attached.
The Enter Symbol dialog box is displayed. Enter a comment and click the OK button.
• Select "In PLC" or "In Peripheral" for statements and notes.

"In PLC" : The data of statements and notes is stored as a part of a program. This enables the
data to be stored in CPUs at factories. However, a lot of program memory capacity
of the programmable controller CPU is required.
"In Peripheral" : The data of statements and notes is stored in the peripheral device (personal
computer) separated from the program. Since a program requires only one extra
step per one location, less program memory capacity is required on the
programmable controller CPUs. However, when programs are modified at factories,
programs in GX Works2 in the peripheral device (personal computer) and those in
programmable controller CPUs do not match. Carefully handle the data.
6 - 22
6.8 Setting Security for Projects
This section explains how to set security for projects to protect the projects and the
data in the projects.
Setting security restricts accesses to projects.
Also, setting security prevents data such as POUs, device comments, and
parameters, which are created by the user, from erroneous modifications or
disclosures to unauthorized users.
POINT
Access levels and access authority

Setting an access level to each user restricts accesses to each data.
An access level is an operating authority given to a login user of the project.
The following five levels are available as the access levels. Data that can be edited by
a user having lower access level can also be edited by a user having higher access
level.
Access level Operating authority
Higher <Administrator level>
Administrators
All operations are possible.
Developers (Level 3)
<Developer level>
Security setting, data access, and a part of operations are restricted.
<Operator level>
Users Only access to project data is possible.
Data cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.
Lower
<Example>
The data with access authority of Developers(Level 2) can be edited by login users
with the access level of Developers(Level 2) or higher (Administrators,
Developers(Level 3), or Developers(Level 2)).
6 - 23
6.8.1 Setting and resetting security for projects
This section explains how to set security for an open project and how to reset the
security.
(1) Setting security for projects

Set a security for a project.
Once security is set for a project, user authentication is required when the
project is opened again.
1) Click [Project] → [Security] → [User

Management].
1) Click!
2) The Use Addition dialog box is displayed.

Enter the following items.
User Name : MITSUBISHI

2) Enter items! Password : MITSUBISHI
Re-enter Password : MITSUBISHI
* When the user name or login password is lost,

logging in to the project is disabled. Do not
enter any other user name or password other
than the above.
3) Click! 3) After entering them, click the OK button.
Security is set for the project.
(2) Resetting security for projects

Deleting all users resets the set security of a project and returns the project to
the status without security. (Refer to section 6.8.2.)
6 - 24
6.8.2 Managing (adding, deleting, and changing) users
This section explains how to manage the registered statuses of users for a project
with security and how to add, delete, and change users.
This function is available only when a user logs in a project with the access level of
"Administrators" or "Developers".
[Displaying the User Management screen]
1) Click [Project] → [Security] → [User

Management].
1) Click!
2) The User Management dialog box is

displayed.
The methods for adding users, changing user

information, changing passwords, and
deleting users are explained from the next
page.
6 - 25
[Adding users]
Add a user to a project with security.
A user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be added.
1) Click the Add... button on the User

Management screen.
1) Click!
2) The User Addition dialog box is displayed.

Enter the following items.
2) Enter items! User Name : Developers

Access Level : Developers(Level3)
Password : Developers
Re-enter Password : Developers
3) After entering them, click the OK button.
3) Click!
4) The user (Developers(Level3)) is added.
6 - 26
[Changing user information]
Change the access level of the user added on the previous page from
"Developers(Level3)" to "Users".
The information of the login user and of a user whose access level is higher than
that of the login user cannot be changed.
1) Select the user name "Developers".
2) Click the Change button.
1) Select!
2) Click!
3) The Change User Data dialog box is

displayed. Select "Users" from the "Access
Level" list box.
3) Select!
4) After selecting it, click the OK button.
4) Click!
5) The access level of the user "Developers" is

changed.
6 - 27
[Changing passwords]
Change the password of a user selected in the list on the User Management screen.
The password of the login user and of a user whose access level is higher than that
of the login user cannot be changed.
To change the password of the login user, click [Project] → [Security] → [Change
Password].
1) Select the user name "Developers".
2) Click the Password Setup button.
1) Select!
2) Click!
3) The Change Password dialog box is

displayed. Enter the following items.
3) Enter password! New Password : Users1

Re-enter Password : Users1
4) After entering them, click the OK button.
4) Click! The password of the user "Developers" is

changed.
[Deleting users]
Delete a user selected in the list with the button on the User
Management dialog box.
The current login user cannot be deleted.
However, when the registered user is only "Administrators" and no other users to be
deleted exist, the current login user can be deleted.
When all users are deleted, security is reset.
6 - 28
6.8.3 Logging in projects
A user authentication is required for opening a project with security.
1) When a project with security is opened, the

User Authentication screen is displayed.
1) Enter items! Enter a user name and a password for log-in,
and click the OK button.
Enter the following user name and password,

which are set in section 6.8.1.
1) Click!
User Name : MITSUBISHI
Password : MITSUBISHI
2) The project is displayed.
6 - 29
6.8.4 Changing access authority for each access level
This section explains how to set an authorization of displaying and saving data for
each access level.
The access authority of access levels higher than that of the login user cannot be
changed.
When the access level of the current login user is "Users", the access authority
cannot be changed.
1) Click [Project] → [Security] → [Data Security

Setting].
1) Click!
2) The Data Security Setting dialog box is

displayed.
4) Set!
3) Select a target item from Access Object.
4) Set "Enable" or "Disable" for reading and

writing data from Access Authority for each
access level by moving the slider.
3) Select!
5) Click!
6 - 30
6.9 Sampling Trace Function
This function is used to acquire data at the specified timing to find how device values
change during program operation and to trace the changes displayed in time series.
For details of the sampling trace function, refer to the manuals of each CPU module.
In this example, the device value at an error occurrence is acquired.
Project name TRACE

Program name MAIN
As a preparation, follow the procedure below.
1) Click the "PLC RAS" tab on the Q Parameter

Setting dialog box.
1) Click!
2) Select "Continue" from the Computation
Error list box in the Operating Mode When
There is an Error area.
2) Change! 3) Click the End button.
4) Write parameters and programs to the CPU.

3) Click!
6 - 31
(1) Setting the sampling trace
1) Click [Debug] → [Sampling Trace] →

[Open Sampling Trace].
1) Click!
2) The Sampling Trace screen is displayed.
3) Click [Debug] → [Sampling Trace] →

[Trace Setting].
3) Click!
(To the next page)
6 - 32
4) The Trace Setting dialog box is displayed.

5) Click! Select "Standard RAM" from the "Target
Memory" list box.
4) Select! 5) Click the Condition Setting tab.
6) Check "Detail Setting" in the Trigger

Condition Setting area and click the
Setting Change button.
6) Check!
6) Click!
(To the next page)
6 - 33
7) The Detail Setting - Trigger Condition dialog

box is displayed. Set the following items.
7) Enter item and set!
In this example, set error occurrence as
trigger condition.
Device/Label : SM0
Condition : -P-
8) Click the End Setting button.
8) Click! 9) The Detail Setting - Trigger Condition dialog

box disappears. Click the End Setting
button to close the Trace Setting dialog box.
10) Set devices to be traced on the Sampling

Trace screen as shown on the left.
11) Check the check box to display the trend

graph of SD0.
11) Check!
12) "SD0" is displayed in the trend graph area on the Sampling Trace screen.
6 - 34
(2) Starting the sampling trace
1) Click [Debug] → [Sampling Trace] → [Start

Trace].
1) Click!
2) The message shown on the left is displayed.

3) The Trace Data Storage Status screen is

displayed when the sampling trace is started.
After confirming that the total data reaches

100%, operate digital switches to generate
an error.
4) The trace result is displayed on the Sampling

Trace screen.
6 - 35
(3) Checking the trace result
1) Scroll the trend graph screen to the trigger

point to check the device value at an error
occurrence.
POINT
Saving trace data to a personal computer

Click [Debug] → [Sampling Trace] → [Export CSV Data]. The following dialog box is displayed.
After entering a file name, click the Save button.
6 - 36
CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE
7.1 Intelligent Function Module
(1) Intelligent function module type

On programmable controller CPUs (hereinafter referred to as QCPUs), some
functions are not supported or are limited in use. Intelligent function modules
support those functions instead of QCPUs.
Therefore users need to select an intelligent function module that is appropriate
for the purpose involved.
QCPUs are compatible with QCPU-compatible intelligent function modules.
The following table shows examples of the intelligent function modules.
Table 7.1 Example of intelligent function module

Number of I/O Module current
Name Function
occupied points consumption
Input module that converts;
0 to 20mA → 0 to 4000 5VDC
Analog-digital converter
16 points (in standard resolution mode),
module (Q64AD)
0 to ±10V → 0 to ±4000 0.63A
(in standard resolution mode)
5VDC
Output module that converts;
0 to 4000 → 0 to 20mA
Digital-analog converter 0.33A
16 points (in standard resolution mode),
module (Q62DAN) 24VDC
0 to ±4000 → 0 to ±10V
(in standard resolution mode)
0.12A
(2) Using intelligent function modules with CPUs

An intelligent function module can be installed on any I/O slots on a main base
unit and extension base unit.
4
I/O slot number 2 3
0 1
Intelligent function module

[Used number]
Power QCPU
supply 16 points of X/Y80 to 8F,
16 points of X/Y90 to 9F
Figure 7.1 Installation of intelligent function module
7-1
7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs
An intelligent function module and a CPU exchange mainly two formats of data.
Bit data ------------Signals that use input Xs and output Ys
Word data --------16-bit data or 32-bit data
QCPU Internal configuration of the intelligent function module

(Programmable controller CPU)
External I/F
X/Y
Device memory such as

Function
Input X
X, Y, M, T, C, D
CPU
Output Y (Bit data)
Program
Buffer memory
Reading data
Writing data (Word data)
Figure 7.2 Internal configuration of the intelligent function module
7-2
7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs
For 1-bit signals exchanged between a QCPU and an intelligent function module,
input Xs and output Ys are used.
Xs and Ys here do not mean external I/Os but symbols that are used in a sequence
program to exclusively represent I/O signals of intelligent function modules. Also
note that I/O numbers are assigned according to the slot where the intelligent
function module is installed.
[X]
Intelligent
function module
Xs in a sequence program represent signals
QCPU
X that are input to a QCPU from an intelligent
READY signal
X Operating condition function module. These signals are
setting completed
X generated on an intelligent function module.
A/D conversion completed
X
Error Note that the Xs are used as contacts in a
program. The following is examples of the
signals.
(1) READY signal
Figure 7.3 This signal notifies a QCPU that an
X from intelligent function module intelligent function module started up
normally at power-on and is ready for
operation.
(2) Operating condition setting completed
This signal is used as an interlock
condition for turning Operating condition
setting request (Y9) on/off when the
following settings are changed.
• A/D conversion enable/disable setting
(buffer memory address 0: Un\G0)
• CH Average time/average number of
times
(buffer memory addresses 1 to 8:
Un\G1 to Un\G8)
• Averaging process setting
(buffer memory address 9: Un\G0)
[Y]
Intelligent
SETs, RSTs, or OUT-Ys represent output
QCPU function module
signals transmitted from a QCPU to an
intelligent function module. These signals
Y are generated on a QCPU. Note that they
Output enable
Y
are used as coils or contacts in a program.
User range
writing
Y
Channel change (Example) D/A converter modules output an
Synchronous Y
output enable instruction (output enable)
Figure 7.4 Y from CPU before outputting analog values
that were converted from digital
values.
7-3
7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules
Data is transmitted or received in 16-bit or 32-bit units. Intelligent function modules

have a buffer memory to store those data.
Intelligent function module Buffer memory address

0 D/A conversion enable/disable
1 CH1 Digital value
QCPU
2 CH2 Digital value
Reading data Data
Buffer 3
Readable and
memory to System area (use prohibited)
writable by QCPU
10
11 CH1 Set value check code
Writing data 12 CH2 Set value check code
Example of memory map: Q62DAN D/A converter module
Figure 7.5 Buffer memory
(1) QCPUs can read and write data to and from the buffer memory. Also note that
some modules can write data to buffer memory from peripheral device via an
interface.
(2) In a buffer memory, space of one word (16 bits) is reserved for each intelligent
function module's unique address.
The smallest address is 0, and these addresses are used to specify a target
module to read or write. The minimum unit is one word. Data of 17 bits to 32
bits is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data.
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Data part
Sign bit
1: Negative Indicated here is +276.
0: Positive (Negative digital values are represented
in two's complement.)
Figure 7.6 Example image of buffer memory content (D/A converter module)
Figure 7.6 shows 16 bits of the buffer memory of a D/A converter module where
a digital quantities have been written. The number is obtained from digital
quantity that a QCPU wrote to the buffer memory within the range from -4096 to
+4095 in signed binary (16 bits long).
(3) A buffer memory is a RAM.
7-4
7.3 Communication with Intelligent Function Module
7.3.1 Communication methods with intelligent function modules
The following table shows the communication methods between a QCPU and an
intelligent function module.
Table 7.2 Communication method with intelligent function modules

Communication
Function Setting method
method
Initial setting, Performs initial settings and auto refresh settings of intelligent function modules.
Auto refresh These settings allow writing/reading data to/from intelligent function modules regardless
setting of communication program creation or buffer memory address.
Ex.) When A/D converter module Q64AD is used

• Initial setting : • A/D conversion enable/disable setting
• Sampling/averaging processing specification,
• Time average/number of times average specification,
• Average time/average number of times specification Use GX Works2.
(Set data in auto refresh settings is stored to the
intelligent function module parameter on a QCPU.)
• Auto refresh setting : Set a device on a QCPU to store the following data to.
• Digital output from Q64AD
• Maximum and minimum values of Q64AD
• Error code
(Set data in auto refresh settings is stored to the
intelligent function module parameter on a QCPU.)
Device initial Writes set data in device initial settings of intelligent function modules to the intelligent Use GX Works2 to
value function modules at the following timings. specify the range
• At power-on of a QCPU for intelligent
• At reset function module
• At switching from STOP to RUN devices (U \G ).
FROM/TO Use this instruction
instruction Read or write data from or to the buffer memory on an intelligent function module. in a sequence
program.
Intelligent Directly handles the buffer memory on an intelligent function module as a device of a Specify this device
function module QCPU. as a device in a
device (U \G ) Unlike "FROM/TO instruction", this requires only one instruction for processing data that sequence
is read from an intelligent function module. program.
Intelligent
Use this instruction
function module
Used to simplify programming for using the functions of intelligent function modules. in a sequence
dedicated
program.
instruction
7-5
7.4 Intelligent Function Module System in Demonstration Machine
Use an A/D or D/A converter module to convert analog signals/digital data that are
input with the volume or digital switch on the demonstration machine.
D/A converter module

A/D converter module
QX QY Q64 Q62
Q61P QCPU Vacant 42 42P AD DAN
slot (64 (64 (16 (16
points) points)points) points)
X/Y90 to X/Y9F
X/Y80 to X/Y8F
X0 to X3F
Y40 to Y7F
(Channel 1) (Channel 1)
V V
Voltmeter for input voltage Voltmeter for output voltage

Input volume
7-6
7.5 Q64AD Analog/Digital Converter Module
7.5.1 Names of parts
The following explains the parts of Q64AD.

For details, refer to the User's Manual.
Q64AD
Q64AD
1) RUN
2) ERROR
V+ 1
C V- 2
H
1
I+ 3
SLD 4
V+ 5
C
H
V- 6
2 I+
7
SLD
8
V+
9
C V-
H
3
10
I+
11
SLD
V+
12
C V-
13
H
4 I+ 14
SLD 15
A.G.
16
17
(FG)
A/D
18
0-±10V
0-20mA
Name and
No. Description
appearance
Indicates the operation status of the A/D converter module.
ON : In normal operation
1) RUN LED
Flicker : In offset/gain setting mode
OFF : 5V power failure or watchdog timer error occurred
Indicates errors and the status of the A/D converter module.
ON : Error occurred
OFF : In normal operation
2) ERROR LED
Flicker : Switch setting error occurred
Values other than 0 has been set to the switch 5
on the intelligent function module.
7-7
7.5.2 A/D conversion characteristics
(1) A/D conversion characteristics on voltage inputs

(For analog input range from -10 to 10V in a standard resolution mode)
4000
2004
2003
Digital output
Digital output value
2002
0 2001
2000
2.5mV
5.0000V
5.0025V
-4000
-10V 0 10V
Analog input voltage Input voltage
Figure 7.12 A/D conversion characteristics (voltage input)
A/D converter modules convert analog values input from other devices to digital
quantities so that CPUs can operate those values. On voltage inputs, for
example, A/D converter modules convert -10V to a quantity of -4000 and 10V to
4000. This means that the modules convert an input voltage of 2.5mV to a
digital quantity of 1, and abandon values smaller than 2.5mV.
(2) A/D conversion characteristics on current inputs

(For analog input range from 0 to 20mA in a standard resolution mode)
4000
2005
2004
Digital output value
2003
Digital output
2002
2001
0 2000
5 A
10.000mA
10.005mA
-4000 Input current

-20mA 0 20mA
Analog input current
Figure 7.13 A/D conversion characteristics (current input)
The modules convert current an input of 0mA to 0 for an output, and 20mA to
4000. This means that the modules convert an input current of 5μA to a digital
quantity of 1, and abandon values smaller than 5μA.
REMARK
A voltage or current value that is equivalent to a digital value of 1 through A/D
conversion (maximum resolution) differs depending on the setting of the
resolution mode (1/4000, 1/12000, 1/16000) or the output range.
7-8
7.5.3 List of I/O signals and buffer memory assignment
(1) List of I/O signals

The following shows a list of the I/O signals for the A/D converter modules.
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown in this section and thereafter are the values
when the start I/O number for the A/D converter module is set to 0.
Signal direction: CPU ← A/D converter module Signal direction: CPU → A/D converter module
Device No. (input) Signal name Device No. (output) Signal name
X0 Module READY Y0
X1 Temperature drift compensation flag Y1
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
*1
X4 *1 Y4 Use prohibited
Use prohibited
X5 Y5
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 High resolution mode status flag Y8
Operating condition setting Operating condition setting
X9 Y9
completed flag request
XA Offset/gain setting mode flag YA User range writing request
XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request
*1 *1
XC Use prohibited YC Use prohibited
Maximum value/minimum value reset Maximum value/minimum
XD YD
completed flag value reset request
*1
XE A/D conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited
XF Error flag YF Error clear request
POINT
*1: These signals cannot be used by the user since they are for system use only.
If these are turned on/off by the sequence program, the functioning of the A/D
converter module cannot be guaranteed.
7-9
(2) Buffer memory assignment (Q64AD)
This section explains the assignment of the Q64AD buffer memory.
POINT
Do not write data to the system areas or areas to which writing data from a
sequence program is disabled. Doing so may cause malfunction.
Buffer memory assignment (Q64AD) (1/2)
Address Read/
Description Default *1
Hexadecimal Decimal write
0H 0 A/D conversion enable/disable setting 0 R/W

1H 1 CH1 Average time/average number of times 0 R/W
5H 5
...
...
System area - -
8H 8
9H 9 Averaging process setting 0 R/W
AH 10 A/D conversion completed flag 0 R
BH 11 CH1 Digital output value 0 R
CH 12 CH2 Digital output value 0 R
DH 13 CH3 Digital output value 0 R
EH 14 CH4 Digital output value 0 R
FH 15
...
...
System area - -
12H 18
13H 19 Error code 0 R
14H 20 Setting range (CH1 to CH4) 0 R
15H 21 System area - -
16H 22 Offset/gain setting mode Offset specification 0 R/W
17H 23 Offset/gain setting mode Gain specification 0 R/W
*1: Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled.
R: Read enabled
W: Write enabled
7 - 10
Buffer memory assignment (Q64AD) (2/2)
Address Read/
18H 24
...
...
System area - -
1DH 29
1EH 30 CH1 Maximum value 0 R/W
1FH 31 CH1 Maximum value 0 R/W
20H 32 CH2 Maximum value 0 R/W
26H 38
...
...
System area - -
9DH 157
9EH 158
Mode switching setting 0 R/W
9FH 159
A0H 160
...
...
System area - -
C7H 199
*2
C8H 200 Pass data classification setting 0 R/W
C9H 201 System area - -
*2
CAH 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*2
CBH 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*2
CCH 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*2
CDH 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*2
CEH 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*2
CFH 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*2
D0H 208 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*2
D1H 209 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*2
D2H 210 CH1 User range settings offset value 0 R/W
*2
D3H 211 CH1 User range settings gain value 0 R/W
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*1: Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled.
R: Read enabled
W: Write enabled
*2: Areas used to restore the user range settings offset/gain values when online module change is
made.
7 - 11
7.5.4 Adding or setting intelligent function module data
This section explains how to set the intelligent function module data.
After an intelligent function module is added to a project, the data settings
(parameters and switch settings) of the intelligent function module can be set.
1) Click [Project] → [Intelligent Function Module]

→ [New Module].
1) Click!
2) The New Module dialog box is displayed.
3) Set the A/D converter module setting as follows.

Module Type : Analog Module
Module Name : Q64AD
Mounted Slot No. : 3
(Specify start XY address: 0080)
4) Click! 4) Click the OK button.
3) Set!
5) The specified intelligent function module data are

added to the Project window.
5) Add!
(To the next page)
7 - 12
6) Double-click Switch Setting.
6) Double-click!
7) The Switch Setting screen is displayed.

7) Set!
Set Input range for CH1 to "0 to 10V".
8) Click!
9) Double-click Parameter.
9) Double-click!
10) The Parameter screen is displayed.

Set "A/D conversion enable/disable setting" for CH2
to CH4 to "1:Disable". (Only CH1 is used.)
10) Set!
(To the next page)
7 - 13
11) Double-click Auto_Refresh.
11) Double-click!
12) The Auto_Refresh screen is displayed.

Set Digital output value for CH1 to "D10".
12) Set!

→ [Intelligent Function Module Parameter List].
13) Click!
(To the next page)
7 - 14
14) Check that "Setting Exist" is checked in Initialization

(Count) and Auto Refresh (Count) for Q64AD in the
Intelligent Function Module Parameter List dialog box.
15) Click the Close button.
15) Click!
7 - 15
7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine
(1) Sequence program

The sequence program executes a sampling processing on analog voltages
input through CH1 of Q64AD, and then converts the analog values to digital
values.
Set the start XY of Q64AD to 80 as explained before.
Project name Q64AD

Program name MAIN
A/D module READY
A/D conversion completed flag

X3 X80 X8E
0 >= D10 K0 BCD D10 K4Y50 Displays digital conversion value
of CH1 on LED
9 END
X80: Module READY signal

X8E: A/D conversion completed flag
At power-on or reset of a programmable controller CPU, this flag turns on if
A/D conversion is ready to be executed. A/D conversion is executed once this
flag turned on.
(2) Operation of the demonstration machine

The Online Data Operation dialog box is displayed. Click the
Parameter + Program button, then click the Execute button to write data
to the CPU. After that, activate the CPU and check the following items.
(a) Turn on X3, and change input voltages for an A/D converter module with
the volume on the demonstration machine.
Analog values that have been input to the channel 1 (CH1) of Q64AD are
stored to the buffer memory (in digital value). With the auto refresh settings,
the QCPU reads the stored digital values and stores them in its data
register D10.
(b) Whenever an analog value is "-1" or smaller, 0 is set.
(c) The digital values are displayed on the digital display (Y50 to Y5F).
7 - 16
7.6 Q62DAN Digital/Analog Converter Module
7.6.1 Names of parts
The following explains the parts of Q62DAN.

For details, refer to the User's Manual.
Q62DAN
1)
2)
3)
Name and
No. Description
appearance
Indicates the operation status of the D/A converter module.
ON : In normal operation
1) RUN LED
Flicker : In offset/gain setting mode
OFF : 5V power failure or watchdog timer error occurred
Indicates errors and the status of the D/A converter module.
ON : Error occurred
OFF : In normal operation
2) ERROR LED
Flicker : Switch settings error occurred
Values other than 0 has been set to the switch 5
on the intelligent function module.
External power
3) Terminal for connecting a 24VDC external power supply
supply terminal
7 - 17
7.6.2 D/A conversion characteristics
(1) D/A conversion characteristics on voltage outputs

(For analog output range from -10 to 10V in a standard resolution mode)
10V
Analog output voltage
Analog output voltage

0
5.0025V
2.5mV
5.0000V
-10V 2000 20012002 2003 2004

- 4000 0 4000 Digital input
Digital input value
Figure 7.14 D/A conversion characteristics (current output)
D/A converter modules convert digital quantities that are input from a QCPU
into analog values, and then output them. For example, the modules convert a
digital quantity of -4000 to a analog quantity of -10V and 4000 to 10V before
output. This means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to an
analog quantity of 2.5mV, and abandon digital input values in decimal places.
(2) D/A conversion characteristics on current outputs

(For analog output range from 0 to 20mA in a standard resolution mode)
20mA
Analog output current
Analog output current
0
10.005mA
5 A
10.000mA
-20mA 200020012002 2003
-4000 0 4000 Input
Digital input value
Figure 7.15 D/A conversion characteristics (current output)
For current outputs, the modules convert a digital value 0 to 0mA and 4000 to
20mA. This means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to an
analog quantity of 5μA, and abandon digital input values in decimal places.
REMARK
A voltage or current value that is equivalent to a digital value of 1 through D/A
conversion (maximum resolution) differs depending on the setting of the
resolution mode (1/4000, 1/12000, 1/16000) or the output range.
7 - 18
7.6.3 List of I/O signals and buffer memory assignment
(1) List of I/O signals

The following shows a list of the I/O signals for the D/A converter modules.
The following explanation is mentioned based on the Q68DAVN, Q68DAIN,
Q68DAV and Q68DAI with 8-channel analog output (CH1 to CH8).
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown in this section and thereafter are the values
when the start I/O number for the D/A converter module is set to 0.
Signal Signal CPU module

D/A converter module → CPU module
direction direction → D/A converter module
Device No. Signal name Device No. Signal name
*1
X0 Module READY Y0 Use prohibited
X1 Y1 CH1 Output enable/disable flag
*2
*1 *2
X4 Use prohibited Y4 CH4 Output enable/disable flag
*2
*2
*2
*2
X8 High resolution mode status flag Y8 CH8 Output enable/disable flag
X9 Operating condition setting completed flag Y9 Operating condition setting request
XA Offset/gain setting mode flag YA User range writing request
XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request
XC Set value change completed flag YC Set value change request
XD Synchronous output mode flag YD Synchronous output request
*1 *1
XE Use prohibited YE Use prohibited
XF Error flag YF Error clear request
POINT
*1: These signals cannot be used by the user since they are for system use only.
If these are turned on/off by the sequence program, the functioning of the D/A
converter module cannot be guaranteed.
*2: For the Q62DAN and Q62DA, the use of Y3 to Y8 is prohibited.
For the Q64DAN and Q64DA, the use of Y5 to Y8 is prohibited.
7 - 19
(2) Buffer memory assignment (Q62DAN)
This section explains the assignment of the Q62DAN buffer memory.
POINT
Do not write data to the system areas or areas to which writing data from a
sequence program is disabled.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
Address *1 Read/
0H 0 D/A conversion enable/disable 3H R/W
1H 1 CH1 Digital value 0 R/W
2H 2 CH2 Digital value 0 R/W
3H 3
...
...
System area - -
AH 10
BH 11 CH1 Set value check code 0 R
CH 12 CH2 Set value check code 0 R
DH 13
...
...
System area - -
12H 18
13H 19 Error code 0 R
14H 20 Setting range (CH1 to CH2) 0H R
15H 21 System area - -
16H 22 Offset/gain setting mode Offset specification 0 R/W
17H 23 Offset/gain setting mode Gain specification 0 R/W
18H 24 Offset/gain adjustment value specification 0 R/W
19H 25
...
...
System area - -
9DH 157
9EH 158 0 R/W
Mode switching setting
9FH 159 0 R/W
A0H 160
...
...
System area - -
C7H 199
*3
C8H 200 Pass data classification setting 0 R/W
C9H 201 System area - -
*3
CAH 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*3
CBH 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*3
CCH 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0 R/W
*3
CDH 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0 R/W
*3
CEH 206 CH1 User range settings offset value 0 R/W
*3
CFH 207 CH1 User range settings gain value 0 R/W
*3
*3
*1: This is the initial value set after the power is turned on or the programmable controller CPU is
reset.
*2: Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled
R: Read enabled
W: Write enabled
*3: Areas used to restore the user range settings offset/gain values when online module change is
made.
7 - 20
7.6.4 Adding or setting intelligent function module data

→ [New Module].
1) Click!
2) The New Module dialog box is displayed.
3) Set the A/D converter module setting as follows.

Module Type : Analog Module
Module Name : Q62DAN
Mounted Slot No. : 4
(Specify start XY address: 0090)
3) Set!
5) The specified intelligent function module data are

added to the Project window.
5) Add!
(To the next page)
7 - 21
6) Double-click Switch Setting.
6) Double-click!
7) The Switch Setting screen is displayed.

Set Output range for CH1 to "0 to 5V".
7) Set!
8) Click!
9) Double-click Parameter.
9) Double-click!
10) The Parameter screen is displayed.

Set "D/A conversion enable/disable setting" for CH1
to "0:Enable". (Only CH1 is used.)
10) Set!
(To the next page)
7 - 22
11) Double-click Auto_Refresh.
11) Double-click!
12) The Auto_Refresh screen is displayed.

Set Digital value for CH1 to "D30".
12) Set!

→ [Intelligent Function Module Parameter List].
13) Click!
(To the next page)
7 - 23
14) Check that "Setting Exist" is checked in Initialization

(Count) and Auto Refresh (Count) for Q62DAN in the
Intelligent Function Module Parameter List dialog
box.
15) Click the Close button.
15) Click!
7 - 24
7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine
(1) Sequence program

The sequence program converts values of the digital switches to analog
signals.
Set the start XY to 90 and the digital value for CH1 to D30 for Q62DAN as
explained before.
Project name Q62DAN

Program name MAIN
X2
0 Y91
X90 X3
2 MOVP K0 D30
X4
MOVP K2000 D30
X5
MOVP K4000 D30
15 END
X90: Module READY signal

At power-on or reset of a programmable controller CPU, this signal turns
on if D/A conversion is ready to be executed. D/A conversion is executed
once this signal turned on.
Y91: CH1 Output enable/disable flag
Turning this flag on or off selects on each channel whether to output D/A
converted values or offset values.
ON: D/A converted value, OFF: Offset value
(2) Operation of the demonstration machine

The Online Data Operation dialog box is displayed. Click the
Parameter + Program button, then click the Execute button to write data
to the CPU. After that, activate the CPU and check the following items.
(a) Turn on X2 to enable D/A outputs of CH1.

(b) Voltage is output according to X3 to X5.
(c) The D/A OUTPUT voltmeter displays the voltage value that the D/A
converter module outputs.
7 - 25
MEMO
7 - 26
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION FUNCTION
8.1 Simulation Function
The simulation function is for debugging a sequence program using the virtual
programmable controller on a personal computer.
The created sequence program can be immediately debugged without connecting a
NOTE
Safety and handling precautions of the simulation function
1) The simulation function simulates the actual programmable controller CPU

to debug a created sequence program. However, this function does not
guarantee the operation of the debugged sequence program.
2) The simulation function uses the memory for simulation to input and output
data to/from the I/O module and intelligent function module. Some
instructions, functions, and device memories are not supported. Therefore,
the operation results obtained from the virtual programmable controller may
differ from those obtained from the actual programmable controller CPU.
8.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
1) Click [Debug] → [Start/Stop Simulation].
1) Click!
2) The GX Simulator2 screen is displayed, and the

simulation starts.
3) To stop the simulation, click [Debug] → [Start/Stop

Simulation] again.
8-1
8.3 Debugging with Example Program
Use the following example for exercise.
<<Example program>>
X0 X1
0 Y70
Y70
M0
4 Y71
SM412 K9999
6 C0
SM400
11 MOV C0 K4Y80
14 END
8-2
8.3.1 Monitoring and testing device status
This section explains how to monitor device status, turn bit devices on/off forcibly,
and change word device values.
(1) Turning bit devices on/off forcibly

In the example operation below, "X0" is forcibly turned on.
1) Click!

2) Enter "X0"! Input "X0" to the "Device/Label" list box.
3) Click the ON button to forcibly turn "X0"

on.
3) Click!
4) Reflected! 4) The result of the device being turned on is

reflected on the ladder monitor screen.
8-3
(2) Changing the word device value
In the example operation below, the word device value "C0" is changed to "5".
1) Click!
2) Enter "C0"!
Input "C0" to the "Device/Label" list box.
3) Select!
4) Enter "5"! 3) Select the "Word[Signed]" from the "Data
Type" list box.
5) Click!
4) Input "5" to the "Value" column.

Set button to forcibly change the current
value of C0 to 5.
6) The change of the value of "C0" to "5" is

reflected on the ladder monitor screen.
6) Reflected!
8-4
CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE
9.1 Typical Trouble
The following bar graph shows the ratio of faulty parts and causes of programmable
controller errors.
[Source: Inspection made by JEMA (The Japan Electrical Manufacture's
Association)]
Figure 9.1 Faulty parts on programmable controllers (multiple answers allowed)
(%)
80 Collected from 223 factories
73.1
60
40 34.1
20.6 19.3
20
14.3
9.4
2.7
0.9
0
I/O
Others
Memory
No answer
CPU
Peripheral device
Communication
Power supply
Figure 9.2 Causes of programmable controller faults (multiple answers allowed)

(%)
50
Collected from 223 factories
40.4
40
30
26.0 24.7 24.2
20 19.3
12.6 12.1
10
6.3
1.3
0
Noise
Short of load
Poor connection
Unknown cause
Others
Vibration shock
Manufacturer's fault
Incorrect programming
No answer
9-1
9.2 Maintenance
To keep programmable controllers in the best operating condition, conduct the

following daily inspection and periodic inspection.
(1) Daily inspection

The following table lists the items that must be inspected daily.
Table 9.1 Daily inspection

Item Inspection item Inspection contents Judgment criterion Measures
Check that fixing
The screws and
Installation of base screws are not loose Retighten the
1 cover must be
unit and the cover is not screws.
installed securely.
dislocated.
Check that the
The module fixing
module is not Securely engage the
Installation of I/O hook must be
2 dislocated and the module fixing hook.
module engaged and
module fixing hook is Or tighten the screw.
installed securely.
engaged securely.
Check for loosening
Screws must not be Retighten the
of the terminal
loose. terminal screws.
screws.
The proper distance
Connection Check for the
must be provided Set the proper
3 conditions distance between
between solderless distance.
solderless terminals.
terminals.
Retighten the
Check the connector Connectors must not
connector fixing
part of the cable. be loose.
screws.
Power supply The LED must be on.
Check that the LED
module (Error if the LED is
is on.
"POWER" LED off)
The LED must be on.
Check that the LED
CPU "RUN" LED (Error if the LED is
is on in RUN status.
off)
The LED must be off.
CPU "ERROR" Check that the LED
(Error if the LED is
LED is off.
on or flashing)
The LED must be off.
CPU "BAT.ARM" Check that the LED
(Error if the LED is
LED is off.
on)
Module indication LED
The LED must be on

when the input power
is turned on. Refer to QCPU (Q
4 The LED must be off mode) User's
Check that the LED when the input power Manual.
Input LED
turns on and off. is turned off.
(Error if the LED
does not turn on or
turn off as indicated
above)
The LED must be on
when the output
power is turned on.
The LED must be off
Check that the LED when the output
Output LED
turns on and off. power is turned off.
(Error if the LED
does not turn on or
turn off as indicated
above)
9-2
(2) Periodic inspection
The following table lists the items that must be inspected one or two times every
half year to a year. When the equipment has been relocated or modified, or
wiring layout has been changed, perform this inspection.
Table 9.2 Periodic inspection

Item Inspection item Inspection contents Judgment criterion Measures
Ambient environment
Ambient
Measure the 0 to 55 °C When the
temperature
temperature and programmable
humidity with a *1 controller is used in the
1 Ambient humidity thermometer and a 5 to 95% RH board, the ambient
hygrometer. humidity in the board is
Measure corrosive gas. Corrosive gas must not the ambient humidity.
Ambience
be present.
Measure the voltage 85 to 132VAC Change the power
2 Power supply voltage across the terminals of
170 to 264VAC supply.
100/200VAC.
Retighten the screws.
Move the module to
The module must be If the CPU, I/O, or
Installation
Looseness, rattling check for looseness and

installed securely. power supply module is
rattling.
3 loose, fix it with screws.
Adhesion of dirt Dirt and foreign matter Remove and clean the
Check visually.
and foreign matter must not be present. dirt and foreign matter.
Looseness of Retighten screws with a Screws must not be Retighten the terminal
Connection conditions
terminal screws screwdriver. loose. screws.
The proper distance

Distance between
must be provided
4 solderless Check visually. Set the proper distance.
between solderless
terminals
terminals.
Looseness of Connectors must not be Retighten the connector

Check visually.
connectors loose. fixing screws.
Even if the lowering of a
battery capacity is not
Check that SM51 or displayed, replace the
(Preventive
5 Battery SM52 is turned off with battery with a new one if
maintenance)
GX Works2. the specified service life
of the battery is
exceeded.
Install the product on Use the normal product
the actual on the actual
The operation must
6 Spare product programmable programmable
meet the specifications.
controller and check the controller as a spare
operation. product.
Compare the stored
Check the stored The two programs must Correct if any difference
7 program with the
program be identical. is found.
running program.
The fan must rotate
Rotation status without abnormal Replace if any error is
Fan (heat exchanger)
8 Rotation sound sounds. found.
filter
Clogging The fan must rotate Clean.
without clogging.
The value must be
Check the offset/gain identical with the Correct if any difference
9 Analog I/O
value. specifications (design is found.
value).
*1: When AnS Series Module is used in the system, the judgment criteria will be from 10 to 90% RH.
9.3 Consumable Product

Backup batteries on programmable controllers are consumable products.
9-3
9.4 Service Life of Output Relay
The output relays of the modules are consumed by the switching operation.
A relay which is directly mounted on the print board of the output module is required
to be replaced the output module itself after the consumption.
1000
500
200
Limit number of switching (unit: 10,000)
100
50
20
10
DC30V
t=0ms
5 DC100V
t=7ms
AC100V COS =0.7
AC200V COS =0.7

AC100V COS =0.35
DC24V
2 t=7ms AC200V COS =0.35
1
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10
Switching current (unit: A)
Figure 9.3 Life characteristics of output relay's contact (QY10, QY18A)
9-4
9.5 Spare Product
Alternative products are easily purchased through Mitsubishi service centers or local
Mitsubishi representatives in Japan. Thus the alternative products can be prepared
even after an accident. However, note that for foreign-related products such as
exported products, alternative products must be sent beforehand.
Considering the following tips at design work makes the maintenance easier.
(1) Easily replaceable type

Replacing building block-type modules is easy. Only replacing the faulty module
is required.
(2) Memory type

To use standard RAMs or SRAM memory cards, backup batteries are required.
The standard ROMs, Flash cards, and ATA cards do not require the battery for
use, besides, these memories prevent unintentional program changes due to
human-related mistakes. These memories are recommended to be employed in
products for export.
(3) Reducing the number of module types

Reducing the number of module types is efficient for reducing the number of
spare product types.
(4) Reserving I/O points

By not using all the I/O points on 16-, 32-, and 64-point I/O modules but
reserving 10% to 20% of them, it is possible to just make changes on wiring and
programs (I/O signals) instead of replacing the faulty module with a spare
module when there are no spare modules.
(5) Creating a document

Since sequence programs are easily modified, the inconsistency between an
operating program and documents may occur (i.e. ladder diagram, program list).
Keep updating the document.
To do this, using a printer is efficient.
(6) Mastering peripheral device

Mastering peripheral device such as a personal computer, GX Works2 helps
the quick recovery from an accident.
9-5
(7) Spare product
Table 9.3 Spare products
Product name Quantity Remark
Storage lives of lithium batteries are about five years.
Therefore, the stock should not be kept all the time but
1 Battery One or two
batteries should be purchased when required. However,
keep stock of one or two for accidental situation.
Note that I/O modules tend to be faulty during a test
One per each operation.
2 I/O module
module type Also note that the contacts of output modules are
consumed in long-term use.
One for each
3 CPU module CPU modules and memory cards are the core parts of a
used model
programmable controller, which means that an error of
One for each them result in the system down.
4 Memory card
used model
Same as above. As the temperature of the power supply
Power supply One for each
5 modules rises easily, and high ambient temperature may
module used model
shorten their service lives.
9-6
9.6 Using Support Equipment
The following shows examples of support equipment in which programmable

controller-used systems or devices automatically notify a detected failure or
operation status to an operator or maintenance personnel during an automatic
control operation.
1. Displaying an error using a commercial lamp
Connect the error lamp to the output module of the programmable controller so
that the lamp flashes when an error is detected.
Lamp flicker
Output module (Y50 to Y6F)

Error indication lamp
Control panel
SM1 SM412
The lamp (Y50) flashes
Y50
when an error is detected.
(Error detection) (1-sec. clock)
2. Displaying an error code on a commercial digital display
Connect the digital display to the output module of the programmable controller
so that the error code number of the detected error is indicated on the digital
display.
Numerical display
Output module (Y70 to Y8F)
Error indication lamp
Error code Error code

0 0 3 2
Control panel
SM1 The error code number is

BCD SD0 K2Y70 displayed on the digital display
(Error detection) (Error code) when an error is detected.
NOTE
The above programs cannot be executed when a stop error occurs.
9-7
3. Displaying the contents of the detected error on the screen
The errors details of the programmable controller can be displayed on an

external CRT screen, plasma screen, and liquid crystal screen.
Screen display
Starting first step in progress

Arm Conveyor
Error occurred! 00070
MELSEC-Q supports a wide variety of GOTs (Graphic Operation Terminals).

In addition to the error display function, GOTs have a lot of useful functions such as
the graphic monitoring, ladder monitoring, device monitoring, touch-panel switch,
and printing function.
(Refer to the catalogs for details.)
9-8
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode
The CPU supports two types of I/O control modes; the direct mode and refresh
mode.
Appendix 1.1 Direct mode
In the direct mode, input signals are imported to a programmable controller every
time they are input and treated as input information. The operation results of a
program are output to the output data memory and the output modules. The
following diagram shows the flow of I/O data in the direct mode.
Programmable controller
CPU
(Operation processing)
Data memory for inputs (X)
2) Test operation using peripheral device 1) Input

Link refresh of MELSECNET/H module
3) Writing from serial communication
modules, etc.
X0
4) Data memory for outputs (Y)
Y75
Y70 Executing the OUT instruction in the Output
sequence program module
5)
Test operation using peripheral device
Writing from serial communication
modules, etc.
• When the input contact instruction is executed:

An OR operation is executed in the input information 1) from the input module and
input information 2) in the data memory. Then the result is used as input
information 3) at sequence program execution.
• When the output contact instruction is executed:
Output information 4) is read from the data memory for output (Y), and a sequence
program is executed.
• When the output OUT instruction is executed:
The operation result 5) of the sequence program is output to the output module,
and is stored in the data memory for output (Y).
• When the QCPU executes I/O in the direct mode, a sequence program uses DX
for inputs and DY for outputs.
App. - 1
Appendix 1.2 Refresh mode
In the refresh mode, all changes caused in an input module are imported to the input
data memory in a programmable controller CPU before every scan. The data in the
data memory is used for an operation.
The operation results made in a program for output (Y) are stored to the output data
memory at every operation. All the data stored in the output data memory is
batch-output to the output module after the execution of the END instruction.
The following diagram shows the flow of I/O data in the refresh mode.
CPU
(Operation processing)
When inputs
3) Data memory for are refreshed Input
inputs (X) module
1)
X0
4)
When outputs
Y75 Data memory for are refreshed Output
Y70 outputs (Y) module
5) 2)
• Input refresh
Input data in the input module is batch-read 1) before the execution of the step 0,
and stored to the data memory for input (X).
• Output refresh
Data 2) in the data memory for output (Y) is batch-output to the output module
before the execution of the step 0.
• When the input contact instruction is executed:
The input data is read from the data memory for input (X) 3), and a sequence
• When the output contact instruction is executed:
The output data 4) is read from the data memory for output (Y), and a sequence
• When the output OUT instruction is executed:
The operation result of the sequence program 5) is stored in the data memory for
output (Y).
App. - 2
Appendix 1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode
In the example ladder given below, turning on input X0 turns on output Y70.
Item Direct mode Refresh mode
DX0 X0
1. Ladder example Y70 Y70
Program execution Program execution

Input instruction (LD X0)
Input instruction (LD X0)
Output instruction (OUT Y70) Output instruction (OUT Y70)
0 END 0 0 0 END 0 END 0 END 0

Input refresh
Output refresh
Minimum delay Minimum delay
2. Response lag X0 X0
Internal input
Y70
from when input Delay
(execution time of the instruction) Y70
is changed to Delay
(One scan)
when output is Maximum delay Maximum delay
X0
changed
Y70 X0
accordingly Delay Internal input
(One scan)
Y70
Delay
(Two scans)
• The delay time ranges from 0 (only execution

time of the instruction) to 1 scan. • The delay time ranges from 1 to 2 scans.
• The delay time is 0 to 1 scan. • The delay time is 1 to 2 scans.
3. Execution time • The direct mode needs longer time than the • Generally, only short time is needed since a
of the I/O refresh mode since a programmable controller programmable controller accesses data
instruction accesses I/O modules. memory.
• The scan time is longer for the execution time • The scan time is shorter for the execution time
of the I/O instructions. of the I/O instructions.
4. Scan time • The actual scan time is the program execution • The actual scan time is the total time of a
time. program execution, input transfer, and output
transfer.
App. - 3
Appendix 2 Special Relay
The special relay (SM) is an internal relay whose application is fixed in the
programmable controller. For this reason, the special register cannot be used in the
same way as other internal registers are used in sequence programs. However, the
bit of the special relay can be turned on or off as needed to control the CPU module.
The following shows how to read the items in the list.
For details of special relays, refer to QCPU User's Manual Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection.
Item Description
Number •
Indicates the special relay number.
Name •
Indicates the special relay name.
Meaning •
Indicates the contents of the special relay.
Explanation •
Explains the contents of the special relay in detail.
•
Indicates the setting side and setting timing of the special register.
<Set by>
S : Set by the system
U : Set by user (in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral
device)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set> indicated only if setting is done by system.
Every END processing : Set during every END processing
Set by
Initial : Set during initial processing (after power-on or
(When set)
status change from STOP to RUN)
Status change : Set when the operating status is changed
Error : Set if an error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when an instruction is executed
Request : Set when requested by a user (using the
special relay)
When system is switched : Set when the system is switched (between the
control system and the standby system)
• Indicates a special relay (M9□□□) supported by the ACPU.
("M9□□□ format change" indicates the one whose application has been
Corresponding
ACPU
M9□□□
changed. Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01, and QnPRH.)
• "New" indicates the one added for the Q-series CPU.
Indicates the CPU module supporting the special relay.
QCPU : All the Q-series CPU modules
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Basic model QCPU
Corresponding Qn(H) : High Performance model QCPU
CPU QnPH : Process CPU
QnPRH : Redundant CPU
QnU : Universal model QCPU
CPU module name : Only the specified CPU model (Example: Q02U)
For details on the following items, refer to these manuals:

• For network related items Manuals for each network module
• For SFC programs MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
Do not change the values of special relays set by the system using a program
or by test operation.
Doing so may result in a system down or communication failure.
App. - 4
Appendix 3 Special Register
The special register (SD) is an internal register whose application is fixed in the
programmable controller. For this reason, the special register cannot be used in the
same way as other internal registers are used in sequence programs. However,
data can be written to the special register to control the CPU module as needed.
Data is stored in binary format if not specified.
The following shows how to read the items in the list.
For details of special registers, refer to QCPU User's Manual Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection.
Item Description
Number • Indicates the special register number.
Name • Indicates the special register name.
Meaning • Indicates the contents of the special register.
Explanation • Indicates the detailed contents of the special register.
• Indicates the setting side and setting timing of the special register.
<Set by>
S : Set by the system
U : Set by user (in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral
device)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set> indicated only if setting is done by system.
Every END processing : Set during every END processing
Set by
Initial : Set during initial processing (after power-on or
(When set)
status change from STOP to RUN)
Status change : Set when the operating status is changed
Error : Set if an error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when an instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is request from a user
(through SM, etc.)
When system is switched : Set when the system is switched (between the
control system and the standby system)
• Indicates special register (D9□□□) supported by the ACPU.
("D9□□□ format change" indicates the one whose application has been
Corresponding
ACPU
D9□□□
changed. Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01, and QnPRH.)
• "New" indicates the one added for the Q-series CPU.
Indicates the CPU module supporting the special relay.
QCPU : All the Q-series CPU modules
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Basic model QCPU
Corresponding Qn(H) : High Performance model QCPU
CPU QnPH : Process CPU
QnPRH : Redundant CPU
QnU : Universal model QCPU
CPU module name : Only the specified CPU model (Example: Q02U)
For details on the following items, refer to these manuals:

• For network related items Manuals for each network module
• For SFC programs MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
Do not change the values of special registers set by the system using a
program or by test operation.
Doing so may result in a system down or communication failure.
App. - 5
Appendix 4 Application Program Example
Appendix 4.1 Flip-flop ladder
(1) Y70 turns on when X0 is turned on, and turns off when X1 is turned on.
X0
0 SET Y70
X1
2 RST Y70
(2) When X2 is turned on, Y71 turns off if Y70 is on, and turns on if Y70 is off. This
flip-flop operation is repeated.
Project name QA-16

Program name MAIN
X2 T1 K5
0 T0
T0 K5
6 T1
Y70
T0
12 Y71
X02
Contact
T0
Contact
T1
Y70
Y71
App. - 6
(3) The flip-flop operation starts when X2 is turned on. In this operation, Y70 turns
on if the timer T0 is on, and Y71 turns on if the timer T1 is on. (Cycle: 10sec.)
Project name QA-17

Program name MAIN
X2 T1 K50
0 T0
T1
T0
7 PLS M0
Y70
M0
11 RST T1
T0 K50
16 T1
T1
T1
22 Y71
PLS M1
M1
26 RST T0
X2
Contact
T0
Contact
T1
Y70
Y71
App. - 7
Appendix 4.2 One shot ladder
(1) Output starts and continues for a certain time after the input X1 is turned on.
(Time for the input being on must be longer than the set time limit.)
X1 K70
0 T15
T15
Y75
X1
Normally closed
contact T15
Y75
Set time limit
7sec.
(2) When the input X0 is turned on momentarily, Y76 turns on for a certain time.
X0 T16 K100
0 T16
Y76
Y76
(3) Output starts and continues for a certain time when the input X0 is switched
from on to off.
X0
0 PLF M1
M1 T16 K100
3 T16
Y76
Y76
X0
Y76
Set time limit
Pulse duration
10sec.
App. - 8
Appendix 4.3 Long-time timer
(1) Necessary time is obtained by connecting timers in serial.

X2 K30000
0 T9 3000.0sec.
T9 K20000
5 T10 2000.0sec.
T10
11 Y72 Turns on after
time limit elapses
X2
Normally open
contact T9
Normally open
contact T10 3000sec. 2000sec.
Y72
5000sec.
(2) Necessary time is obtained by using timers and counters.

Time limit of timer Set value of counter = Long-time timer (note that accuracy
of timers are accumulated.)
Project name QA-18

Program name MAIN
X2 M56 Y73 K9000

0 T14
X2 C7
7 Y73 Turns on after
Y73 time limit elapses
T14 K4
12 C7
M56
C7
18 RST C7
One scan
X2
Coil T14
Normally open
contact T14 (M56)
C7
Y73
900sec. × 4 = 3600sec. = 1 hour
(Note) Sufficient time is obtained with the counter C7 which counts the number of
time-outs of the timer T14.
M56 resets T14 after time-out. With C7, the output Y73 is self-energized
while count up is in progress. With Y73, T14 is reset and the following time
count is stopped.
App. - 9
Appendix 4.4 Off delay timer
MELSEC-Q does not provide off delay timers. Configure an off delay timer as
follows.
(1) The timer T6 starts operating when X5 is turned off.

Y70 X5 K8
0 T6
X5 T6
6 Y70
Y70
X5
Coil T6
Normally closed
contact T6
Y70
Set time limit
0.8sec.
(2) Turning on X5 momentarily sets the operation ready.

The timer T8 starts operating when X6 is momentarily turned on.
X5 T8
0 Y71
Y71
X6 Y71 K41
4 T8
M45
M45
X5
X6
Coil T8, M45

Normally closed
contact T8
Y71
Set time limit
4.1sec
(Note) The above ladder operates as an off delay ladder by momentarily turning on
inputs X5 and X6.
M45 is equivalent to a momentary contact of T8.
App. - 10
Appendix 4.5 On delay timer (momentary input)
An on delay timer of a programmable controller operates easily with a continuous

input. A relay M must be used with a momentary input.
Project name QA-19

Program name MAIN
X1 X2 K62
0 T4 Timer starts after X1
M50 turns on, and continues
M50 to be activated.
T4
8 Y70 Turns on 6.2sec. later
T4
10 Y71 Turns off 6.2sec. later
X1
X2
T4,M50
Y70
Y71
Set time limit

6.2sec.
(Note) The above ladder operates as an on delay ladder by momentarily turning on

inputs X1 and X2.
App. - 11
Appendix 4.6 ON-OFF repeat ladder
In an ON-OFF repeat ladder, Y70 turns on when X1 is turned on, and turns off when
X1 is turned on again.
X1
0 FF Y70
Appendix 4.7 Preventing chattering input
The timer is set so that it starts output when the input keeps being on for 0.2sec.
X0 K2
0 T1
T1
5 M1
M1 turns on when X0 keeps being on for 0.2sec. or longer. Therefore, use M1

instead of X0 when creating a program.
App. - 12
Appendix 4.8 Ladders with a common line
The following ladder cannot be operated as it is. To make such ladders controllable,
use master control instructions (MC, MCR) in the program.
Manual Automatic
X0 X1 X4 X3 Y71
Y70
Relay ladder X2
X7 Y79 X2
Y71
X6
X7
Y71
Project name QA-1

Program name MAIN
Sequence program with master control instructions

X0 X1
0 MC N0 M1
X2
4 M10 Manual circuit
X6 X7
6 M11
9 MCR N0
X1 X0
10 MC N0 M2
X4 X3
14 M20 Automatic circuit
X7 Y79
17 M21
20 MCR N0
M10 Y71
21 Y70
M20
M11 X2
25 Y71 Common circuit
M21
Y71
Note) In GX Works2, the on/off status of the master control is displayed in the title tag on the monitor screen.
App. - 13
Appendix 4.9 Time control program
The time value is set in the two digits of a digital switch. The currently elapsed time
is displayed on Y40 to Y47 while the outputs Y70 to Y72 turn on after the set time
limit has elapsed.
This operation is repeated.
Digital switch for setting time Display for current time
59 0.1sec. units Programmable

controller
26 0.1sec. units
X20 to 27 Y40 to 47
Push button for X3 Turns on when current

reading time Y70 value is less than 2sec.
Switch for timer X4 Turns on when current
Y71 value is just 3sec.
Switch for operation X5
Y72 Turns on when current
value is 4.1sec. or more
Project name QA-2

Program name MAIN
X3
0 PLS M5
M5 Reads set time
3 BIN K2X20 D1
2 digits in 0.1sec. units
X4 T4 D1
7 <> K0 D1 T3 Starts timer
T3 K10 Repeats flicker
16 T4
X5
21 BCD T3 K2Y40 Outputs time value to exterior
Turns on when T3 is from
> K20 T3 Y70 0.1 to 1.9sec.
= K30 T3 Y71 Turns on when T3 is 3.0sec.
Turns on when T3 is 4.1sec.
< K40 T3 Y72 or more.
App. - 14
Appendix 4.10 Clock ladder
The clock data such as hour, minute, and second is output to a digital display.
Project name QA-3

Program name MAIN
T1 K5
0 T0
T0 K5 0.5-sec. flickering
5 T1
T1 K60
10 C11 Counts seconds
C11
15 RST C11
K60
C12 Counts minutes
C12
24 RST C12
K99
C13 Counts hours
C13
33 RST C13
SM400
38 BCD C11 K2Y40
BCD C12 K2Y48
BCD C13 K2Y50
0
Ones 1 Ones
47 seconds digit 2
3
digit 64 hours
K2Y40 K2Y50
4
Tens 5 Tens
digit 6 digit
7
8
Ones 9
18 minutes digit A
B
K2Y48
C
Tens
D
digit
E
F
LED of output module
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y4F Y4E Y4D Y4C Y4B Y4A Y49 Y48 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Tens digit Ones digit Tens digit Ones digit Tens digit Ones digit
K2Y50 hour, Output K2Y48 minute, Output K2Y40 second, Output
App. - 15
Appendix 4.10.1 Clock function (supplement)
The following ladder displays the time setting set in GX Works2 to the Q
demonstration machine.
Project name QEX13
App. - 16
App. - 17
Appendix 4.11 Starting - operation of electrical machinery
Turning on the start switch starts the operation. After the operation time has
elapsed, the operation mode is activated through an arc interlock state.
Project name QA-20

Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 Y70 During operation
Y70 Y72 K20
T5 period timer
Y70 T5 Y72
9 Y71 operation
T5 K5
13 T6 Arc interlock
T6 Y70 Y71
18 Y72 operation
Y72
Start X0
Stop X1
Operation Y70
operation
Y71
Y72 operation
T5 = 2sec.
T6 = 0.5sec. Arc interlock
App. - 18
Appendix 4.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit
The following ladder outputs the time elapsed in the timer on the LED display, and
indicates that the set time limit has been reached. This system can also be applied
to counters.
Elapsed time display

(Four digits of BCD)
Output module
1234
X2 Y6C to 6F
× 100
Y68 to 6B
× 10
Starts when turned on Y64 to 67
Stops when turned off ×1
Y60 to 63
× 0.1
X2 K6000 Timer starts when

0 T53 X2 is turned on
Outputs current
BCD T53 K4Y60 value of timer
= K500 T53 Y76 Turns on when
Y76 current value is
50sec. or more
> K120 T53 Y77 Turns on when

current value is
12sec. or less
X2 K3000 Timer starts when

0 T4 X2 is turned on
Outputs current
BCD T4 K4Y60 value of timer
> K300 T4 Y70 Turns on when current
value is 30sec. or less
Turns on when current
< K299 T4 > K320 T4 Y71 value is from 30 to 31.9sec.
Turns on when current
< K319 T4 > K340 T4 Y72 value is from 32 to 33.9sec.
< K339 T4 Y73 Turns on when current
value is 34sec. or more
<= K600 T4 Y74 Turns on when current
<= K800 T4 Y75 Turns on when current
App. - 19
Appendix 4.13 Retentive timer
The input X2 switches between on and off continuously. The on-time of X2 is

accumulated and Y72 turns on according to this accumulated value n.
(1) For a ladder that accumulates a value without a retentive timer
Project name QA-21

Program name MAIN
X2
0 M0 Timer starts when
X2 is turned on
M0
2 PLS M1
K600
T195
M1 Writes D7 to timer
9 MOV D7 T195 when X2 is turned on
M0 Saves current value
12 MOV T195 D7 of timer to D7
T195
15 MOV K0 D7 Clears D7 by time-out
Y72 Y72 turns on by time-out
(2) When retentive timers are assigned in the device setting of the PLC parameter
Retentive timer (ST): 224 points (ST0 to ST223)
Project name QA-8

Program name MAIN
X2 K600
0 ST195 Timer starts when
ST195 X2 is turned on
5 Y72 Cannot be cleared
X1 by turning off
7 RST ST195 Can be cleared by
turning on X1
App. - 20
Appendix 4.14 Switching timer set value externally
(1) With an external switch, a value to be set in one timer can be selected from
three patterns; 1sec., 10sec., and 100sec.
A timer is activated and reset with a push button switch.
OL
1sec. Indicates the timer
X0 Y70 is in operation.
SC 10sec. RL
X1 Indicates the timer
100sec. Y70 has gone time out.
X2
PB Starts timer
X3 Y70 MC Load
PB Resets timer
X4
Input power supply Load power supply
Project name QA-22

Program name MAIN
X0
0 MOV K10 D0 Set value 1sec.
X1
X2
X3
9 SET M0 Starts timer
X4
11 RST M0 Stops timer
M0 D0
12 T8
Y70 Turns on while timer

T8 is in operation
19 Y71 Turns on by time-out
Y72
App. - 21
Appendix 4.15 Setting counters externally
With an external digital switch having 4 digits, a counter can be set remotely and
their current values are displayed in 4 digits. In addition to every count-up, the timer
outputs data when it reaches a value 100 short of the set value and a value 50 short
of the set value.
Note that a setting error is indicated if the set value of the counter is less than 100.
I/O I/O I/O I/O

UNIT1 UNIT0 UNIT3 UNIT4
Digital switch (BCD × 4 digits)
X20 to 2F X0 to 1F Y60 to 6F Y70 to 74
1 2 3 4
DC12V
AC100V
PB
Setting signal X0
Y70
PB RL Setting error
Start X5
Y71 ON during
PB RL
X1 operation
Reset or stop
Y72 Turns on 100
DC12V R1
Count pulse short of set value
X3 Current value display
BCD × 4 digits Y73 Turns on 50
R2
short of set value
DC24V
Y74 Turns on at
R3 counter stop
Setting value
Maximum setting value 9999
Setting error range
Start 100 short of set value 50 short of set value Count up

Turn on X5 Y72 ON Y73 ON Y74 ON
Y71 ON
App. - 22
Project name QA-4
Program name MAIN
X0
0 SET M0 Setting
X1
2 RST M0
M0
4 BIN K4X20 D0 Reads set value
> K100 D0 Y70 Outputs error when

set value is 100 or less
M0 Y70
12 MOV D0 D1
- K100 D1 Set value -100

(100 short of set value)
MOV D0 D2
- K50 D2 Set value -50

(50 short of set value)
X5 C0
24 Y71 ON during operation
Y71
Y71
28 MC N0 M3
X3 D0
31 C0 Counter that turns on
at stop
D1
C1 Counter that turns on
100 short of set value
D2
C2 Counter that turns on
50 short of set value
44 MCR N0
X1
45 RST C0 Counter is reset by
turning on X1
RST C1
RST C2
M0
58 BCD C0 K4Y60 Displays counted
values to exterior
C1
62 Y72 Turns on at 100 before
C2 the set value
64 Y73 Turns on at 50 before
C0 set value
66 Y74 Turns on by count up
Note) In GX Works2, the on/off status of the master control is displayed in the title
tag on the monitor screen.
App. - 23
Appendix 4.16 Measuring operation time
Setting an operation time to a control target is useful for judging the timing of a
component replacement and lubrication. The timer ST and data register D must
have a backup power source so that they can continue operating at a power failure.
With the contents of D31 (in one hour units) displayed externally, the program can
work as an operation timer.
Project name QA-23

Program name MAIN
X2 K3600
0 ST250 6-minute timer
ST250
5 RST ST250
+ K1 D30
1-hour timer
= K10 D30 MOV K0 D30
+ K1 D31 Measures in
SM400 (always ON) 1 hour units
21 BCD D31 K4Y60 Outputs operation
time to exterior
25 <= K1000 D31 Y70 Indicates timing
to replace
The management time is set to 100 hours.
Appendix 4.17 Measuring cycle time
Measuring the operation time of a control target (from its start to end) allows
displaying the cycle time-out and managing a control time lag.
The following ladder in which the <, >, and = instructions are used to determine the
state of T200 indicates a cycle time-out and measures a time lag with the counter.
Project name QA-24

Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 M56 In cycle
M56
M56 T200 K32760

4 T200 Measures cycle time
10 < K400 T200 SET Y70 Cycle time run out

K32760
14 < K300 T200 >= K400 T200 C10 Number of cycle times
X7 of 3.01 to 4.00sec.
24 RST Y70 Clears time out display
and accumulated counts
RST C10
App. - 24
Complement
Appendix 4.18 Application example of (D) C M L (P)
The following explains how to obtain absolute values of negative values -32768 or
smaller (to -2147483648, 32 bit data).
D1 D0
B B B B B B B B
15 14 1 0 15 14 1 0
Before DCML 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
DCML D0 D20 execution (Negative number)
D+ K1 D20 D21 D20
After DCML 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
execution
D21 D20
After D+ execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
(Absolute value)
(Example)
Every time X1 is turned on, 999 is subtracted from a set value and the result is
displayed.
When the result value is negative, the output Y70 turns on, and the absolute value of
the result is displayed.
Reading the set value Turn on X0
Subtraction (-999) Turn on X1
Negative number NO
obtained?
YES
Y70 setting
DCML execution
+1 execution
Result display
X0
0 DBIN K4X20 D0 Inputs data
X1
4 D-P K999 D0 Subtracts 999
D> K0 D0 SET Y70 Turns on Y70 when

negative number is obtained
PLS M0
M0
18 DCML D0 D20 When D0 is negative number,
two's complement is taken to
D+ D20 K1 D30 have positive number (absolute value)
DBCD D30 K8Y40 Outputs absolute value

Y70
31 DBCD D0 K8Y40 Outputs positive number
App. - 25
Appendix 4.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals
(1) Example 1
The program displays the operation result using a dividend and a divisor which
are individually specified in two 4-digit digital switches on two 4-digit displays
(integral part and decimal part).
Digital display
Digital switch
Y5F to Y50 Y4F to Y40
QCPU QX QY
42 42P
X3F to X30
X2F to X20
X0
Importing dividend and divisor Dividend Digital switch X30 to X3F → D0

Divisor Digital switch X20 to X2F → D1
Division
(D0) / (D1) = (D2) ...... (D3)

Displaying a quotient
Quotient Remainder
Clearing index registers Z0
and Z1 and data register D10
FOR 4 × (Z1) → (D10) HC-(D10) → (Z0)

1st time 4 × 0 → 0 HC-K0 → HC
Setting the display address
after decimal point 2nd time 4 × 1 → 4 HC-K4 → H8
3rd time 4 × 2 → 8 HC-K8 → H4
Multiplying the remainder with 10, 4th time 4 × 3 → 12 HC-K12 → H0
dividing the result, and taking a
quotient of lower 1 digit (D3) × 10 → (D3)
(D3) / (D1) = (D2) ...... (D3)
Displaying the lower 1 digit
Y4C to 4F
Y48 to 4B
Y44 to 47
Y40 to 43
Counting the number of times

(register Z1)
INC Z1
NO Last- Last- Last- Last-
4 obtained? 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
NEXT
digit digit digit digit
YES
END
App. - 26
Sequence program of example 1
The FOR-NEXT instruction is executed to divide each decimal place individually and
4 decimal places are displayed in K4Y40.
Project name QA-5

Program name MAIN
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0 Reads data
BINP K4X20 D1
/P D0 D1 D2 Division
BCDP D2 K4Y50 BCD-outputs a quotient
DMOVP K0 Z0 Clears index register Z0
MOVP K0 D10 Clears D10
PLS M0
22 FOR K4
M0
24 * K4 Z1 D10
- H0C D10 Z0
* D3 K10 D3
Repeats for 4 times
/ D3 D1 D2
BCD D2 K1Y40Z0
INC Z1
45 NEXT
Executing the INC Z1 instruction adds one to Z1.
App. - 27
(2) Example 2
In example 2, D0 is divided by D1 to obtain D5 in 4 decimal places.
The dividend D0 is multiplied with 10000. The result of the dividing calculation
using this multiplied value is converted to a BCD value and output to an external
digital display.
K4Y60 K4Y50 K4Y40
D7, remainder of D6, integral number D5, decimal number

a decimal number in 4 digits in 4 digits
Project name QA-6

Program name MAIN
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
MOVP K0 D2 Clears D2
*P D0 K10000 D3 10000-fold
D/P D3 D1 D5
DBCDP D5 D5
DBCDP D7 D7
MOVP D6 K4Y50 Integral part
MOVP D5 K4Y40 Decimal part
MOVP D7 K4Y60 Decimal number

remainder
App. - 28
Appendix 4.20 Carriage line control
The following is an example of a sequence control using a carriage to convey works

(materials).
Series of operations performed in one cycle is as follows; A work is set on the
carriage, the carriage moves forward, the carriage stops at the forward limit, the arm
pushes the work to the other conveyor side, and the carriage moves back to the
backward limit.
Container for work
LS open complete (X4) LS work present (X1)
LS backward
limit (X3)
Push (Y73)
Carriage
Carriage moves
forward (Y71)
Push back Carriage moves

(Y74) back (Y72)
Operating panel
LS forward
limit (X2)
Operation Start button (X0)
indicator (Y70)
MELSEC-Q
Input Output
Start button
X0 Y70 Operation indicator
Switch (LS work present)
X1 Y71 M Carriage moves forward
Switch (LS forward limit)
X2 Y72 M Carriage moves back
Switch (LS backward limit)
X3 Y73 Push
Switch (LS open complete)
X4 Y74 Push back
App. - 29
Project name QA-10
Program name MAIN
X0 M2
0 Y70 Operation indicator
Y70 X1 X3
PLS M1
M1
SET Y71 Carriage moves forward.
Y71 X2
RST Y71
SET Y73 Push

Y73 K30
T0
T0
RST Y73
SET Y74 Push back

Y74 X4
RST Y74
SET Y72 Carriage moves back.

Y72 X3
RST Y72
M2 Completion flag
Timing chart
Start button X0
Switch (LS work present) X1
Switch (LS forward limit) X2
Switch (LS backward limit) X3
Switch (LS open complete) X4
Operation indicator Y70
Carriage moves forward. Y71
Carriage moves back. Y72
Push Y73
Push back Y74
3sec
App. - 30
Appendix 4.21 Compressor sequential operation using ring counters
This system provides pressure control using three compressors.

A pressure shortage is detected by the three pressure switches. The number of
compressors operating simultaneously depends on the degree of shortage. To equal
the number of usages of each compressor, compressors are activated according to
the set order.
System configuration of compressor control
MELSEC-Q
Compressor A B C
Pressure switch
PX1 PX2 PX3

Operating panel
Pressure shortage "Major"

Sufficient
pressure Pressure shortage "Medium"
Pressure shortage "Minor"
Start button Stop button
MELSEC-Q
Start Input Output
PB0 MC
X0 Y70 Compressor A
A
Stop
PB1
X1 MC
Y71 Compressor B
Pressure switch B
PX1
X2
MC
PX2 Y72 Compressor C
C
X3
PX3
X4 Y73 Sufficient pressure
Y74 Pressure shortage "Minor"
Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium"
Y76 Pressure shortage "Major"
App. - 31
Operation explanation
(1) The pressure switches (X2, X3, and X4) are initially off. In this state, turning on
the start switch (X0) activates the three compressors all together, and when
sufficient pressure is obtained (X2, X3, and X4 turn on), the three compressors
stop. This is the basic operation of this system.
If all the compressors are at stop with sufficient pressure or the pressure
shortage "Minor" is detected (X4 turns off), one compressor is activated to
supply pressure until sufficient pressure is obtained.
The compressor activated at this time activates in order from A to C each time
compressors are reactivated in reaction to pressure shortage.
Note that the stop switch (X1) is available for stopping compressors at any time.
(2) If one compressor does not supply sufficient pressure and the pressure
shortage level goes up to "Medium" (X3 turns off), the second compressor is
activated to support the first compressor. This second compressor will be
compressor C if compressor A has been in operation, A if B has been in
operation, and B if C has been in operation.
(3) If two compressors do not supply sufficient pressure and pressure shortage
level goes up to "Major" (X2 turns off), the last compressor is also activated.
When only one compressor is in operation and pressure shortage level goes
from "Minor" to "Major" directly, the rest two compressors are activated
simultaneously.
(4) When two or three compressors are in operation, they continue operating
together until sufficient pressure is obtained. Then they stop together when
sufficient pressure is obtained (X4 turns on).
Timing chart
Start - (X0)
PX3 - (X4)
Pressure switch PX2 - (X3)
PX1 - (X2)
A - (Y70)
Compressor B - (Y71)
C - (Y72)
Pressure shortage Major Minor Minor Medium Major Minor Minor Minor Medium
Compressor A,B,C B C A,C A,B,C A B C A,C
App. - 32
Project name QA-11
Program name MAIN
X0 X1
M0
X4
4 Y73 Indicates pressure status
X4 X3 X4 Y76 Y75
6 Y74 Pressure shortage "Minor"
Y74 Pressure shortage "Minor" is indicated
when the pressure switch X4 turns off.
X3 X2 X4 Y76
13 Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium"
Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium" is indicated
when the pressure switch X3 (Medium) turns off.
X2 X4
19 Y76 Pressure shortage "Major"
Y76 Pressure shortage "Major" is indicated
when the pressure switch X2 (Minor) turns off.
M0
23 PLS M1 Turns on M9 at startup
Y74
26 PLS M2 Shifts by pressure
M1 shortage "Minor"
29 SET M9
M0
31 RST M9
RST M12
Resets when
RST M11 X1 (stop) turns on
RST M10
M2
36 SFT M13
SFT M12
Shift register
SFT M11
SFT M10
M10
45 RST M13
M0
M13
48 SET M10 Returns shift to M10
X4 M0 M10
50 Y70 Compressor A
Y75 M11
Y76
M11
Y71 Compressor B
Y75 M12
Y76
M12
Y72 Compressor C
Y75 M10
Y76
App. - 33
After the basic operation, one compressor is activated in reaction to pressure
shortage detected. To use the three compressors equally, they are activated
according to the set order. This control is enabled by the 3-stage ring counter
(ring-shaped shift registers) M10 to M12.
A shift signal is generated when pressure shortage is detected (X04 switches from
on to off).
Compressor
A B C
X0, Start SET

M9 M10 M11 M12
X1, Stop RST
X4, (PX3)
OFF
Shift operation
X4
M10
M11
M12
App. - 34
Appendix 4.22 Application example of positioning control
The following is an example of a positioning system with a pulse generator that

outputs pulses per motor, brake, and unit of distance.
In this system, a command value is set with the digital switch, and this set command
value is compared with the current value at start-up to determine in which direction,
forward or reverse, the motor rotates. The current value in the register D16 is
subtracted by 1 in forward direction, and incremented by 1 in reverse direction.
Positioning is completed when the command value matches the current value. The
current value is converted to a BCD value so that current position is represented in
4-digit decimal numbers.
Home position
Forward Reverse
Pulse rotation rotation Motor Brake
generator
Home
position MELSEC-Q
X2
Start Forward
rotation Reverse
X0 Y70
rotation
Y71 Brake
X1 Y72
Command value setting switch Current value display
5 4 0 0 3 6 2 8
mm mm
X20 to 23 Y4C to 4F
X1 X1000
X24 to 27 Y48 to 4B
X10 X100
X28 to 2B Y44 to 47
X100 X10
X2C to 2F Y40 to 43
X1000 X1
Project name QA-26

Program name MAIN
X0 M2
M0
Y72 Releases brake
BINP K4X20 D15 Reads command value
< D15 D16 Y70 Forward rotation
> D15 D16 Y71 Reverse rotation

M0 X1 Y70
20 -P K1 D16 -1 during forward rotation
Y71
+P K1 D16 +1 during reverse rotation
= D15 D16 M2 Checks consistency with

X2 command value
38 MOV K0 D16 Executes home position return
SM400 (always ON)
41 BCD D16 K4Y40 Displays current value
to exterior
App. - 35
Appendix 4.23 Application example using index Z
(1) The number of manufactured products is counted every day in one month cycle,
and the resulting number is stored to the corresponding register of the date (D1
to D31).
(2) The planned number of products to be manufactured is inputted with the
external digital switch. Production stops when this number is accomplished.
(3) The date is also specified with the external digital switch.
(4) The accumulated number of products manufactured in the current month as
well as the number of manufactured products on the current day is displayed to
exterior.
K2X20 K2Y58
Date 3 0 3 0 Date display
K4X30 Input Output K4Y40 Manufactured number

Planned number 0 1 8 0 module module 0 1 8 0 on current day
of products
X02 K4Y60
Count value 3 7 8 2 Accumulated number
The number of products manufactured on the current day is counted by C5.

The accumulated number of products manufactured is counted by C6.
The date is entered in the index Z to indirectly specify the data register
corresponding to the date using D0Z0.
When Z0 is 30, D0Z0 becomes 0 + 30, specifying D30.
Stores the resulting

number of each day
ranging from 1 to 31
in D1 to D31.
Accumulated number
Planed number of products
Date
Manufacturing results of each day ranging from 1 to 31 are stored in D1 to D31,

which are available as production data.
App. - 36
Project name QA-7
Program name MAIN
0 = K0 K4X20 MOV K32760 D35 Digital switch

SM410 X2 D35 Writes 32760 to D35 and counts
5 C5 products manufactured
(0.1-sec. clock) when X20 to 2F are 0
Tentative count C5 K32760
value is set C6
X0
16 <> K0 K4X20 BIN K4X20 D35 Inputs production command
BIN K2X30 D36 Inputs date
<= K32 D36 SET M2
<= K1 D36 >= K31 D36 RST M2

Y70 flashes to indicate error
PLS M3 when date exceeding 31 is set
M2 SM411
43 Y070
M3
46 <> D36 Z0 RST C5
MOV D36 Z0 Specifies date indirectly

SM400 (always ON)
57 MOV C5 D0Z0 Stores number of products
manufactured to data register
BCD Z0 K2Y58 Displays manufacture date
to exterior
BCD D0Z0 K4Y40 Displays number of products
manufactured on current day
BCD C6 K4Y60 Displays number of products
manufactured in one month
MOV C6 D33
X6
71 -P C5 C6 Clears number of products
manufactured on day anytime,
RST C5 if necessary
X7
79 RST C5
RST C6
Clears all at end of month
FMOV K0 D0 K32
FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3
FMOV K0 D0 K32 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to D0 to D31.
FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to K4Y40, K4Y50, and K4Y60.
App. - 37
Appendix 4.24 Application example of FIFO instruction
Manual coating work and its working time can be stored and duplicated by
machinery later.
MELSEC-Q Left (Y71) (Y70) Right

Left Right Conveyor system
X01 X00
Cleaning
In automatic (Y72) 3) 5)
Cleaning 1) 2) 6)
operation Step
X02 Y73 4)
Recording Reading Teaching panel

X03 X05
X 20 21 22 23 24 25
Automatic Stop
Coating bath
X06 X07
Position is detected by sensors of
Magnified view of teaching panel X20 to 25
FIFO table
Pointer D10 6 D30 6

K2 Y74
1 Read using FIFRP
Step 1) 11 31 1
1
2) 12 2 32 2
3) 13 8 Data is backed up when X03 is turned on 33 8

Coating bath
pattern 4) 14 4 34 4
5) 15 16 Backed up data is read 35 16

when X05 is turned on
6) 16 32 36 32
37 0
K2X20 32 Write using FIFWP 38 0
FIFO table 39 0
Pointer D20 6 D0 (timer constant of T0) 40 6

Read using FIFRP
Step 1) 21 135 135 41 135
2) 22 150 42 150
Data is backed up when X03 is turned on 43
3) 23 120 120
Cleaning
time
4) 24 100 44 100
Backed up data is read 45
5) 25 20 when X05 is turned on 20
6) 26 135 46 135
Current value of T1 0
Write using FIFWP 0

D0 135
App. - 38
Operation pattern from manual to automatic operation
Teaching panel Cleaning machine Coating bath
X00 = Manual right moving button Y70 = Conveyor, Moving right X20 = Coating bath-1 (K2X20 = K1)
X01 = Manual left moving button Y71 = Conveyor, Moving left X21 = Coating bath-2 (K2X20 = K2)
X02 = Manual cleaning button Y72 = Conveyor, Cleaning X22 = Coating bath-3 (K2X20 = K4)
X03 = Recording data button X23 = Coating bath-4 (K2X20 = K8)
X05 = Reading data button X24 = Coating bath-5 (K2X20 = K16)
X06 = Automatic operation button X25 = Coating bath-6 (K2X20 = K32)
X07 = Operation stop button
Y73 = Automatic operation
indication LED
Start moving to right (X00 = ON) 1)

Moving to right (Y70 = ON)
Stop moving to right (X00 = OFF) Standby position (K2X20 = 0)
Stop moving (Y70 = OFF) Coating bath-1 (K2X20 = 1)
Start cleaning (X02 = ON)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
Finish cleaning (X02 = OFF)
Stop cleaning (Y72 = OFF) A
Stop moving to right (X00 = OFF) Coating bath-2 (K2X20 = 2)
Stop moving (Y70 = OFF)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
Stop cleaning (Y72 = OFF)
Stop moving to right (X00 = OFF) Coating bath-4 (K2X20 = 8)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
Start moving to left (X01 = ON) 4)
Moving to left (Y71 = ON)
Stop moving to left (X01 = OFF) Coating bath-3 (K2X20 = 4)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
Coating bath-5 (K2X20 = 16)
Stop moving to right (X00 = OFF)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
6)
Start moving to right (X00 = ON)
Stop moving to right (X00 = OFF)
Cleaning (Y72 = ON)
Start automatic operation
(X06 = ON ? OFF) Moving to left (Y71 = ON)
Automatic operation indication LED
(Y73 = ON) (Starts the automatic operation)
A
The same operation is repeated from (A).
App. - 39
Project name QA-9
Program name MAIN
SM403
0 FMOV K0 D0 K50 Resets data to 0 only once at RUN
X6 X7 M2 SM403
5 > D10 K0 Y73 Outputs to automatic operation indication LED
(Automatic operation mode is also indicated.)
Y73
Y73 T0
14 PLS M1 FIF0 reading pulse in automatic operation
M1
>= KO D10 M2 Finishes automatic operation
18
if data is not present
M1 M2
FIFRP K2Y74 D10 Reads position data of coating bath
23
if data is present
FIFRP D1 D20 Reads cleaning time

M1 M2 T2 Y73
31 M3 Reading completed flag
M3
M5 M3 Moves conveyor to right

37 > K2Y74 K2X20 M4 since current position is on left
M4
M4 M3 Moves conveyor to left

44 > K2X20 K2Y74 M5 since current position is on right
M5
M3 T0 Y73 K10
Completes the movement and
51 = K2Y74 K2X20 T2 starts cleaning (preventing chattering)
T2 T2 D1
T0 Auto-cleaning timer
X0 X1 Y73 Y71
67 Y70 Moves conveyor to right
M4
X1 X0 Y73 Y70
73 Y71 Moves conveyor to left
M5
X2 Y73 SM403
79 > K2X20 KO M6 In auto-cleaning
M6
T2
87 Y72 Cleaning from conveyor
M6
M6 K3200
90 T1 Measures manual cleaning time
M0V T1 DO Records manual cleaning time
PLF M7 Auto-cleaning end pulse

M7
99 > K6 D10 FIFWP K2X20 D10 Records position of coating bath
FIFWP D0 D20 Records cleaning time

X3 Y73
109 BM0V D10 D30 K20 Saves recorded data
X5 Y73
115 BM0V D30 D10 K20 Reads saved data
SM400
121 BCD D10 K1Y60 Displays number of recorded data
125 END
App. - 40
Appendix 4.25 Application example of data shift
Works are conveyed along with their code numbers, and the data register of the
processing machinery is analyzed to machine the work according to its code
number.
X0
Start During
X1 operation
Stop Y70
Input Output
Code number K1X20 module module
1 to 8 Type detection
X2
Shift
Movement of work
instruction
Data
Machinery register Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8
A D30 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
B D31 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18
C D32 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28
D D33 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38
E D34 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48
F D35 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57 M58
A code number is stored in the data register, and M corresponding to the stored
number is activated to machine the work.
Machinery A Machinery B Machinery C Machinery D Machinery E Machinery F
D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
A code number is A code number shifts

input by K1X20. when X2 is turned on.
App. - 41
Project name QA-12
Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 Y70 During operation
Y70
SM400 (always ON)

4 MOV K1X20 D30 Imports code number
X2
8 DSFLP D30 K6 Shifts code number
Y70
12 = K1 D30 M1
= K2 D30 M2
= K3 D30 M3
= K4 D30 M4
Machinery A
= K5 D30 M5
= K6 D30 M6
= K7 D30 M7
= K8 D30 M8
Y70
53 = K1 D31 M11
= K2 D31 M12
= K3 D31 M13
= K4 D31 M14
Machinery B
= K5 D31 M15
= K6 D31 M16
= K7 D31 M17
= K8 D31 M18
Y70
94 = K1 D32 M21
= K2 D32 M22
= K3 D32 M23
= K4 D32 M24
Machinery C
= K5 D32 M25
= K6 D32 M26
= K7 D32 M27
= K8 D32 M28
App. - 42
Y70
135 = K1 D33 M31
= K2 D33 M32
= K3 D33 M33
= K4 D33 M34
Machinery D
= K5 D33 M35
= K6 D33 M36
= K7 D33 M37
= K8 D33 M38
Y70
176 = K1 D34 M41
= K2 D34 M42
= K3 D34 M43
= K4 D34 M44
Machinery E
= K5 D34 M45
= K6 D34 M46
= K7 D34 M47
= K8 D34 M48
Y70
217 = K1 D35 M51
= K2 D35 M52
= K3 D35 M53
= K4 D35 M54
Machinery F
= K5 D35 M55
= K6 D35 M56
= K7 D35 M57
= K8 D35 M58
App. - 43
Project name QA-14
Program name MAIN
Appendix 4.26 Example of operation program calculating square root of data
The data stored in D5 is calculated to its square root and the result is stored in D6
and D7.
X0
0 MOVP K4X20 D5 Sets data
Square root
BSQR D5 D6 operation
MOVP D7 K4Y50 Square root
(integral part)
MOVP D6 K4Y60 Square root
(decimal part)
Results of square root operation are stored as follows.
Integral part Decimal part A value in 5th decimal digit is rounded off.
D5 D6 D7 Therefore, a value in 4th decimal place
= has error of ±1.
0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
(BCD value) (BCD value) (BCD value)
REMARK
QCPUs provide square root operation instructions for data in a real number
(floating point) format.
App. - 44
Project name QA-15
Program name MAIN
Appendix 4.27 Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data
A value stored in D10 is calculated to its n-th power ("n" is a value stored in D14)
and the result is stored in D10.
X1
0 FMOVP K0 D10 K10 Clears data
BINP K4X30 D10 Sets data
MOVP D10 D15
BINP K2X20 D14

Sets n
-P K1 D14
SCJ P0
X1
18 CJ P0
21 FOR D14
X1 Multiplies value
23 D* D10 D15 D10
n times
28 NEXT
P0 X1
29 D/ D10 K10000 D16
BCD-outputs value
DBCD D16 K6Y50
in 10 digits to exterior
DBCD D18 K4Y40
NOTE
An operation error occurs if a value in D10 exceeds 2147483647.
App. - 45
Appendix 4.28 Program using digital switch to import data
When a set value of the digital switch is always input and stored to D10 of the
Digital switch Input module CPU
1 2 3 4
X20 Data
to register
X2F Converted into BIN D10
SM400 (always ON)

Wrong
configuration BIN K4X20 D10
In the above program, changing a value of the digital switch while the programmable
controller is in RUN may cause codes other than 0 to 9 depending on the timing of
the change, which may cause an operation error of the CPU.
To avoid this, write a program as follows.
(Example 1) For 4 digits of X20 to X2F

SM400
0 <= K0 K1X20 >= K9 K1X20 MOV K1X20 K1M20
<= K0 K1X24 >= K9 K1X24 MOV K1X24 K1M24
<= K0 K1X28 >= K9 K1X28 MOV K1X28 K1M28
<= K0 K1X2C >= K9 K1X2C MOV K1X2C K1M32
BIN K4M20 D10
(Example 2) For 8 digits of X20 to X3F

SM400
0 RST Z0
4 FOR K8
7 <= K0 K1X20Z0 >= K9 K1X20Z0 MOV K1X20Z K1M100Z
+ K4 Z0
31 NEXT
SM400
32 DBIN K8M100 D10
DBCD D10 K8Y40
App. - 46
Appendix 4.29 Displaying number of faults and fault numbers using fault detection program
The following program sequentially displays the number of turned-on bit devices
(such as X, M, and F) among many bit devices being used continuously, together
with their device numbers.
[Application example]
When M or F is used as an output device of a fault detection program, use the
following program to obtain a certain fault number from the faults.
[Sequence program flow]

(Operating procedure)
Device F is used in
Fault detection ladder
the program example.
X2 ON OFF
Display B Display A
1) Searching for faulty

Displays the number of
(ON) devices
faulty devices on display A. (Y50 to Y5F) (Y40 to Y4F)
2) Displaying the number
of faulty devices
Display C
(Y60 to Y6F)
X0 ON OFF
Displays the fault
Displaying the first number on display C.
fault number
Condition of program
The total number

of faulty circuits
is set to 50.
X1 ON OFF
Displaying the number of
remaining faulty devices
including currently Displays the number of remaining
displayed number and faulty devices on display A.
the next fault number Displays the next fault number on display C.
NO Displaying the YES

last fault number End
App. - 47
Project name QA-31
Program name MAIN
X20
0 F3
X24
4 F5
X28
8 F8
X2C
12 F13
X30
16 F33
X34
20 F35
X38 Faulty circuit
24 F37
X3C
28 F39
X4
32 F1
X5
36 F11
X6
40 F16
X7
44 F40
X2 M200
48 DSUMP K8F1 D0
MOVP D0 D10 Searches for

ON devices
DSUMP K8F33 D0
+P D0 D10
BCDP D10 K4Y40
SET M400
RST M700
X000 M200 M400
73 PLS M500
SET M700
M500
80 SET M200
RST M600
Specifies start number
MOV K0 Z0 of faulty circuit
(F1 to 0)
DMOV K8F1 D0
M600
95 DMOVP K8F33 D0
App. - 48
M100 M200
103 DROR D0 K1
Searches for ON
SM700
SET M100 devices shifting
32-bit data to right
INC Z0
BCD Z0 K4Y60
X1 M700
120 PLS M300
M300
125 RST M100 Searches for
K0 D10 - K1 D10 next ON devices
<
BCD D10 K4Y40
144 = K32 Z0 SET M600
150 = K50 Z0 RST M200
MOVP K0 K4Y60 Resets when

PLS M800 search is finished
M800
164 RST M400
(1) Searching for ON devices
DSUMP K8F1 D0
DSUMP K8F33 D0
32 bits
F F F F F F
3231 4 3 2 1
S before
execution (K8F1) 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
B15 B0
A0 after
execution 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
The total number of bits with 1 is stored in BIN.

(in this example, 16)
Turning on X2 stores the number of turned-on bits among F1 to F64 to D10 and
display it.
App. - 49
F F Transferred by the MOVP instruction
16 1
D0 D10
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16 16
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
F F
32 17
F F
48 33
D0
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Added by a
7
+P instruction
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
F F F
64 50 49
D10
Number of ON inputs among X20 to 5B 23
(2) Searching for ON devices shifting 32-bit data to right DROR D0 K1
F F F F F F
DMOV K8F1 D0 32 31 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 1
DMOV K8F33 D0
32 bits
DMOV instruction
D1,D0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
D1 D0
(16 bits) (16 bits)
DROR D0 K1
D1 D0
B31B30B29 B28B27 B17B16B15B14B13 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Before
execution 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
Contents of To B31
B0 before Carry flag
execution (SM700)
After 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
execution
To B31
(a) Turning on X0 sets the above shift data (D0 and D1). After that, the data is
shifted right by 1 bit at each scan until a turned-on bit is detected.
When a turned-on bit is detected, shifting stops in that scan (SM700 turns
on), and the accumulated number of shifts (equivalent to a device number)
is displayed.
(b) Each time X1 is turned on, the next turned-on bit is detected and the
detected device number is displayed. At the same time, 1 is subtracted
from the number of turned-on bits which have been obtained in advance to
display the remaining number of turned-on bits.
App. - 50
Appendix 5 Memory and File to be Handled by CPU Module
Data to be stored in memories

The following table lists the data and drive numbers which can be stored in
the program memory, standard RAM, standard ROM, and memory card.
Memory
CPU module built-in memory Memory card (ROM)
card (RAM)
File name and
Item Program Standard Standard Remarks
SRAM card Flash card ATA card extension
memory RAM ROM
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Drive 0 Drive 3 Drive 4 Drive 1 Drive 2
Parameter PARAM.QPA 1 data/drive
Intelligent function
module IPARAM.QPA 1 data/drive
*2
parameter
Program *3 *4 *4 *4 ***.QPG -
Device comment *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 ***.QCD -
Device initial value ***.QDI -
Device data ***.QST -
File register *7*8 *9 ***.QDR -
*7 1 data/CPU
Local device ***.QDL
module
Sampling trace file *7 ***.QTD -
Error history data ***.QFD -
Device data DEVSTORE.
storage file QST -
Module error IERRLOG.
collection file QIE -
MEMBKUP0.
Backup data file -
QBP
Programmable
controller user *10
***.*** -
data
User setting
*11 - -
system area
: Required, : Storable, : Not storable
*1: A drive number is used to specify a memory to be written/read by the external device using a sequence program or MC protocol.
Since the memory name is used to specify the target memory in GX Works2, the drive number needs not to be considered.
*2: Store the intelligent function module parameters in the same drive with the parameters.
When they are stored in different drives, the intelligent function module parameters do not become valid.
*3: A program stored in the standard ROM cannot be executed.
Store the program to the program memory before execution.
*4: To execute a program stored in the memory card, make the setting in the Boot File tab of the Q Parameter Setting window.
*5: The device comments cannot be read by instructions in a sequence program.
*6: Reading from a sequence program requires several scans.
*7: Only each one of file register, one local device, and sampling trace file can be stored in the standard RAM.
*8: For the number of storable file registers, refer to QnUCPU User's Manual Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals.
*9: A sequence program allows reading only. No data can be written from the sequence program.
*10: Data can be written or read with the following instructions.
• SP.FREAD (batch-reads data from the specified file in the memory card.)
• SP.FWRITE (batch-writes data to the specified file in the memory card.)
*11: Set an area used by the system.
App. - 51
Memory capacities and necessity of formatting
The following tables list the memory capacities and necessity of formatting
of each memory.
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UD(E)CPU Formatting
10K steps 15K steps 20K steps 30K steps
Program memory *1
(40K byte) (60K byte) (80K byte) (120K byte)
Standard ROM 256K byte 512K byte 1024K byte Unnecessary
Standard RAM - 128K byte 192K byte *1
Q2MEM-1MBS: 1M byte
SRAM Q2MEM-2MBS: 2M byte Necessary (use
-
card Q3MEM-4MBS: 4M byte GX Works2.)
Q3MEM-8MBS: 8M byte
Flash Q2MEM-2MBF: 2M byte
- Unnecessary
Memory card Q2MEM-4MBF: 4M byte
card
Q2MEM-8MBA: 8M byte
ATA Necessary (use
- Q2MEM-16MBA: 16M byte
card GX Works2.)
Q2MEM-32MBA: 32M byte
Q04UD(E)H Q06UD(E)H Q010UD(E)H Q13UD(E)H Q20UD(E)H Q26UD(E)H

Formatting
CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU
40K steps 60K steps 100K steps 130K steps 200K steps 260K steps
Program memory *1
(160K byte) (240K byte) (400K byte) (520K byte) (800K byte) (1040K byte)
Standard ROM 1024K byte 2048K byte 4096K byte Unnecessary
Standard RAM 256K byte 768K byte 1024K byte 1280K byte *1
Q2MEM-1MBS: 1M byte
SRAM Q2MEM-2MBS: 2M byte Necessary (use
card Q3MEM-4MBS: 4M byte GX Works2.)
Q3MEM-8MBS: 8M byte
Memory
Flash Q2MEM-2MBF: 2M byte
card Unnecessary
card Q2MEM-4MBF: 4M byte
Q2MEM-8MBA: 8M byte
ATA Necessary (use
card GX Works2.)
*1: When the memory contents become indefinite in the initial status or due to the end of battery life, the memory is automatically formatted after the
programmable controller is powered off and then on or is reset. Make sure to format the memory in GX Works2 before using.
App. - 52
Appendix 6. Comparison with GX Developer (changes)
(1) Supported CPU modules

The following table lists the CPU modules that are supported in GX Works2.
Programmable controller type
series
QCPU (Q mode) High Performance model QCPU
(Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H)
Universal model QCPU
(Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE,
Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDH,
Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH,
Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH)
The following table lists the CPU modules that are not supported in GX Works2.
Use GX Developer for the following CPU modules.
Programmable controller type
series
QCPU (Q mode) Basic model QCPU (Q00J, Q00, Q01)
Process CPU (Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q25PH)
Redundant CPU (Q12PRH, Q25PRH)
Remote I/O master (QJ71LP21, QJ71BR11)
QCPU (motion) All programmable controller types
QCPU (A mode) All programmable controller types
QSCPU All programmable controller types
QnACPU All programmable controller types
ACPU All programmable controller types
Motion controller (SCPU) All programmable controller types
CNC (M6, M7) All programmable controller types
App. - 53
(2) Unsupported features
The following table lists the features that are not supported in GX Works2.
Use GX Developer, GX Simulator, or GX Configurator for the following features.
Unsupported feature Alternate S/W

Online function TEL function GX Developer
Debug function for ladder program Monitor condition/Monitor stop condition setting GX Simulator
function
Scan time measurement function
Skip/Parts/Step execution function
Debug function for ST program Debug function
Breakpoint function
Intelligent function module Protocol FB support function GX Configurator-SC
programming function
Intelligent function module debug Debug support function
function
Online function for positioning Trace function GX Configurator-QP
module System monitor function
Test mode function
Device initial value function Device memory registration function GX Developer
Printing function
Password function Password registration function for data in project GX Developer
Interaction with GX Explorer Boot by GX Explorer GX Developer
Interaction with PX Developer Boot by PX Developer GX Developer
Interaction with GX Converter I/O function with GX Converter GX Developer
MEDOC print format import Import in MEDOC print format GX Developer
Online function Intelligent module diagnostics from system monitor GX Developer
GX Configurator
Sampling trace function Sampling trace function conditionally on step number GX Developer
App. - 54
(3) Supported project types
The following table lists the project types that are supported in GX Works2.
Project type Description

Simple project This is the equivalent of the "Do not use label" project of GX Developer.
(without labels)
1) When a project created in the "Do not use label" of GX Developer is read with GX
Works2, the project becomes the Simple project (without labels).
2) When a project created in the Simple project (without labels) of GX Works2 is read with
GX Developer, the project becomes the "Do not use label" project.
Simple project This is the equivalent of the "Use label" project of GX Developer.
(with labels)
1) When a project created in "Use label" of GX Developer is read with GX Works2, the
project becomes the Simple project (with labels).
2) When a project created in the Simple project (with labels) of GX Works2 is read with GX
Developer, the project becomes the "Use label" project.
Structured project In GX Works2, "structured programming" is available. The structured programming
proceeds while creating POUs and combining them (registering tasks in the program file).
1) When a project created in "Use label" with ST of GX Developer is read with GX Works2,
the project becomes "Structured Project"
2) The projects created in "Structured Project" of GX Works2 cannot be read with GX
Developer.
(a) Using project functions

Before using the project function in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Function Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer GX Works2
Protect projects By installing projects as "monitoring By setting projects as "read-only with the
only", the projects can be protected on "Security" function, project-by-project protection
each personal computer. is now available.
Change project types Project types cannot be changed from The following project type changes are now
"Do not use label" to "Use label". available.
1) From "Simple project (without labels)" to

"Simple project (with labels)"
2) From "Simple project (with labels)" to
"Structured Project"
* Project type cannot be changed directly from
"Simple project (without labels)" to "Structured
Project".
Read GX Developer Selecting [Project] → [Open Other Project] can read GX Developer format projects.
format projects
Read GX Selecting [Project] → [Intelligent Function Module] → [Import GX Configurator-QP Data] can
Configurator-QP format read GX Configurator-QP format projects.
projects
Copy data in a project It is enabled on the project copy dialog Copy and paste is now available in the Project
to different projects box. window.
App. - 55
(4) Programming languages supported by each project type
The following table lists the programming languages that are supported by each
project type of GX Works2.
Project type Supported programming language

Simple project Ladder, SFC (MELSAP3)
(without labels)
Simple project Ladder, SFC (MELSAP3)
(with labels) * Supported program element: label, structure, function block
Structured project Ladder, SFC (MELSAP3), structured ladder, ST
* Supported program element: label, structure, function block, function block, library
The following programming languages are not supported in GX Works2.

Use GX Developer for the following programming languages.
Project type Supported programming language

List 1) When GX Works2 reads out a program created with lists in GX Developer, it can be
displayed or edited in ladder.
2) When GX Developer reads out a program created with ladder in GX Works2, it can be
displayed or edited in list.
MELSAP-L 1) When GX Works2 reads out a program created with MELSAP-L in GX Developer, it can
be displayed or edited in ladder.
2) When GX Developer reads out a program created with SFC (MELSAP3) in GX Works2, it
can be displayed or edited in MELSAP-L.
(a) Using ladder language

Before using the ladder language in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.

Program giving devices It is enabled by the "Alias" function. Use "Label".
an alias
Segment a part of It is enabled by the "Macro definition/ Use "Function Block".
program into POUs import" function.
(macros)
Find/Replace Find is enabled by directly typing an Pressing the Space key on the ladder editor
instructions/devices/lab instruction/device/label in "Read mode". allows the simple find.
els
Check use status of It is enabled by the "Cross Reference Select [Find/Replace] → [Cross Reference], or
device/label List" function and "List of Used Devices" [Find/Replace] → [Device List].
functions.
Merge the programs It is enabled by the "Merge Data" Use copy and paste on the label editor.
function.
Verify No corresponding function The Verify Result window clearly shows the
following: "unmatched area of the programs",
"only verification source contains the program"
and "only verification destination contains the
program".
App. - 56
(b) Using SFC (MELSAP3) language
Before using the SFC (MELSAP3) language in GX Works2, review the
following precautions.

Change block number It is enabled by the "copy and paste" Each block data is displayed in the Project
function in block list. window, and the block number can be
changed in the property of each block data.
* Selecting [View] → [Open SFC Blocklist]

can display the block list equivalent to that
of GX Developer.
Auto scroll A new block diagram can be opened by Selecting [View] → [Open Zoom/Start
block start. Destination Block] can open it.
Open a start source block No corresponding function Selecting [View] → [Back to Start SFC
by block start Block] can open it.
Open operation/transition Moving a cursor on the SFC diagram can Selecting [View] → [Open Zoom/Start
condition programs display zoom (operation output /transition Destination Block] can open it. Or
condition). double-clicking while pressing the Ctrl key
also can open it.
Multiple zooms (operation output/transition condition) can be simultaneously displayed.
* Changing the "Setting of Zoom Display" option can switch the display in a window in the
same way as GX Developer.
(c) Using labels

Before using labels in GX Works2, review the following precautions.

Check devices It is enabled by the "Show assigned Check on the ladder editor by selecting [View]
automatically assigned to device" function of label editor. → [Device Display].
labels
Import/Export device It is enabled by the "device comment Use the copy and paste on the label editor
comments to labels import" function and "device comment and device comment editor.
export" functions.
Use pointer-type labels Local pointers are assigned. Common pointers are now assigned.
For projects with labels, 2048 points are set
by default in "Common Pointer No." in the
"PLC System" tab of PLC Parameter.
Unusable reserved words The definition of reserved words is different between GX Developer and GX Works2.
for label name
App. - 57
(d) Using function blocks
Before using function blocks in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Function Description
Use function blocks created with Function blocks created with ladder can be used for ladder program, ST program,
ladder and SFC program operation outputs.
* When using function blocks created with ladder for ST programs, select [Tool] →
[Options] → [Compile] → [Basic Setting] → "Enable function block call 'from
ladder to Structured Ladder/FBD' and 'from Structured Ladder/FBD or ST to
ladder".
Use function blocks created with Function blocks created with structured ladder can be used for ladder programs,
structured ladder structured ladder programs and ST programs.
Use function blocks created with Function blocks created with ST can be used for ladder programs, structured
ST ladder programs, and ST programs.
* When using function blocks created with ST for ladder programs, select [Tool] →
[Options] → [Compile] → [Basic Setting] → "Enable function block call 'from
ladder to Structured Ladder/FBD' and 'from Structured Ladder/FBD or ST to
ladder".
When the option "Enable function When the VAR_IN_OUT input variable and output variable have different
block call 'from ladder to label/device, the input variable value is always equal to the output variable value.
Structured Ladder/FBD' and
'from Structured Ladder/FBD or
ST to ladder" is set
(5) Using device comments

Before using device comments in GX Works2, review the following precautions.

Delete comments of It is enabled by the "Delete unused After checking the unused device by selecting
unused devices comments" function. [Find/Replace] → [Device List], delete the
device comment directly.
Sample comment Sample comments of the special Comments of the special relay/special register
relay/special register are provided in and intelligent function module can be imported
project format. by the "Import from Sample Comment" function
on the device comment editor.
(6) Using device memory

Before using the device memory in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Device memory display Multiple device ranges can be displayed in a window.
* By selecting "All Range" when devices are input, all the device ranges can be displayed
in a window in the same way as that of GX Developer.
Copy and past device To copy and paste device memory data to Excel, select [Tool] → [Read from Excel
memory data to Excel File]/[Write to Excel File].
App. - 58
(7) Using device initial values
Before using device initial values in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.

Maximum amount of Only one set of data can be created. Up to 800 sets of data can be created.
device initial value data to
be created
Restriction of device The device number must be within the The device number must be within the device
number maximum points of each setting range of the PLC parameter.
programmable controller of devices.
Write to PLC/read from Only 1 data can be read and written. Selected multiple data can be read and written.
PLC
IC memory card
write/read
(8) Using online function

Before using the online function in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.

Connection destination A project can contain only one set of A project can contain multiple sets of
setting "connection destination" information. "connection destination" information.
To change the "connection destination"
information, select "Connection Destination" in
the Project window.
Write/Read data to/from Data can be written or read to/from Selecting [Online] → [Write to PLC] writes data
intelligent function CPU modules and intelligent function to CPU modules and intelligent function
modules modules simultaneously. modules simultaneously.
Selecting [Online] → [Read from PLC] reads
data from CPU modules and intelligent function
modules simultaneously.
Write data to the Flash It is enabled by the "PLC write (Flash The "PLC write (Flash ROM)" function is now
ROM of the CPU module ROM)" function. integrated in the "Write to PLC" function.
Select [Online] → [Write to PLC].
Remote operation window Selecting [Online] → [Remote Operation] and [Diagnostics] → [System Monitor]/[PLC
PLC diagnostics window Diagnostics] can display the module image and the programmable controller CPU
System monitor window operation status is now easy to see.
The remote operation, memory operation, and clock setup can be started from the PLC
Diagnostics window.
Read from PLC Symbolic information in GX Developer format does not include SFC programs. Read
symbolic information on "Simple project (without labels)".
If symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read out, the project
becomes uncompiled.
App. - 59
(9) Using monitor/debug function
Before using the monitor/debug function in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Entry device monitor The "entry device monitor" function is now a docking window as a "watch" function so that it
can be displayed without overlapping with the program editor.
Device/label is now enabled to be entered by dragging and dropping from the program
editor and the on/off status of bit devices and current values of word devices can be
modified on the monitor window.
Device batch The "device batch monitoring" and "buffer memory batch monitoring" functions are now
monitoring integrated to realize the same operability.
Buffer batch monitoring The on/off status of bit devices and current values of word devices can be modified on the
monitor window.
Monitor and test To use the monitoring or test function to FL-net (OPCN-2) interface unit and AS-i master
intelligent function unit, execute the "watch" and "Device/Buffer memory batch monitor" function.
modules
(10) Using printing function

Before using the printing function in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Additional information The displayed image is printed or previewed.
print such as statement To print additional information such as a statement and device comment, put the target
and device comment information on the screen and then select [Project] → [Print Window]/[Print Window
Preview].
(11) Copying saved project data

Before copying project data saved in GX Works2, review the following
precautions.
Copy saved project data Saved project data can be copied by Copy all the workspace name folders and
copying files under the project name "workspacelist.xml" created in the same hierarchy
folder. as the workspace name folders.
(12) Compatibility with GX Developer

For the compatibility between GX Developer and GX Works2, review the
Open projects in other Before opening a GX Developer "Use label" project of which a program and function
formats block have the same name, change the data name in GX Developer.
Function names of ST language are different between GX Developer and GX Works2.
Compile the program and correct errors.
Export projects to GX Applicable projects are the following;
Developer format file 1) Simple project (without labels)
2) Compiled Simple project (with labels)
Projects using labels in SFC language are executed.
The project can be saved in GX Developer format when none of the following is applied.
1) No device is set.
2) The length of the label name exceeds 16 characters.
3) Label name contains a device name or reserved word.
4) An invalid character is used.
5) Data type which is not supported by GX Developer is used.
6) A value which is not constant is used in the constant.
Data registered to the global label is set as "Auto External" for all the local labels.
App. - 60
(13) Compatibility with GX IEC Developer
For the compatibility between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2, review the
Open projects in other Function names of ST language are different between GX IEC Developer and GX
formats Works2.
Compile the program and correct errors.
User library Before using GX IEC Developer user libraries which a password is set to, cancel the
password in GX IEC Developer.
(14) Key operation

This section explains the differences of the key operation between GX
Developer and GX Works2.
Shortcut key
Read mode Activates the read mode. Shift + F2 - (*1)
Edit
Write mode Activates the write mode. F2 - (*1)

Cross reference Displays the cross reference. -
Find/Replace
Device List Displays the device list. -

Convert
Convert (all programs being edited) Converts all programs being edited. Ctrl + Alt + F4 -
Switches display/non-display of the

Project data list Alt + O -
project data list.
View
Switch between the project data list Switches between the project data list
Alt + 7 -
and window and each window.
Switches between the ladder window
Switch between ladder and list Alt + F1 -
and list window.
Monitors ladders of all the opened
Monitor (all the windows) Ctrl + F3 -
programs.
Monitor
Activates the write mode during ladder

Monitor (write mode) Shift + F3 - (*2)
monitoring.
Stops the ladder monitoring for all the
Stop monitor (all the windows) Ctrl + Alt + F3 -
opened programs.
Turns on or off the device forcibly or
Online
Device test Alt + 1 -

modifies the current value.
Executes selected sequence
Skip execution Alt + 2 -
Debug
programs in skip execution.

Executes sequence programs
Partial execution Alt + 3 -
partially.
Executes the programmable controller
Step execution Alt + 4 -
CPU in step execution.
Remote operation Executes remote operations. Alt + 6 -
*1: In GX Works2, switching the ladder editor to the read mode/write mode is
unnecessary. The ladder can be edited any time.
*2: In GX Works2, switching the ladder editor to the monitor (write mode) during the
ladder monitoring is unnecessary.
Even during the ladder monitoring, the ladder can be edited and written to the
programmable controller in the RUN status.
App. - 61
Appendix 7 Customizing Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys of each function can be customized.

Customized shortcut keys can be registered as a template and utilized.
Screen display
Select [Tool] → [Key Customize].
Item Description
Shortcut Key -
Category Select a category from the group list categorized by window.
Command Select a function name whose shortcut key is to be changed.
Current Key Displays the shortcut key assigned to the selected command.
Specify a new shortcut key to be assigned. Pressing a key(s) on the
Press the keys to assign keyboard assigns the key(s).
Example)
Displays the menu name to which the entered shortcut key is assigned.
Current When the key is already assigned to another function, the function name is
displayed.
Select a template of shortcut keys from the list box.
• Default Setting
The default setting is set.
Template
• GPPA Format Setting
The shortcut key setting at ladder programming is changed to the same
setting as that at GPPA.
App. - 62
Screen button
Assigns the shortcut key. The assigned shortcut key is displayed in "Current Key".
Deletes the shortcut key selected in "Current Key".
The Enter Template Name screen is displayed.

Register the assigned shortcut keys as a template with a name.
The registered template is displayed in "Template".
The selected template of shortcut keys is applied.
Deletes a template selected in "Template".
Imports a pre-saved template file (*.gks) and adds it to "Template".
Saves a template selected in "Template" as a template file (*.gks).
App. - 63
Appendix 8 Indexing
In the Universal model QCPU (excludes Q00UJCPU), expanding the index register
to 32 bits enables the indexing for all the file register areas.
Serial number access SM400
format file register DM0V K1042431 Z0
Conventional area
ZR0
to which indexing
used of Universal model QCPU

M0V ZR0Z0 D0
Area to which indexing can be

ZR1
can be used
To index the serial number access format file
ZR32767 register (ZR) with 32-bit, use the index register (Z).
ZR32768
ZR4184063
A method for specifying index registers for 32-bit indexing can be selected from
following two methods.
• Specifying the index range used for 32-bit indexing

• Specifying the 32-bit indexing using "ZZ" specification
(1) When specifying the index range used for 32-bit indexing
(a) Each index register can be set between -2147483648 and 2147483647.
The following shows an example of indexing.
X0
DMOV K40000 Z0 Stores 40000 in Z0.
X0
Stores the data of
MOV ZR10Z0 D0
ZR10Z0 = ZR{10+40000}
= ZR40010 in D0.
Indexing
(b) Specification method

For indexing with a 32-bit index register, specify the start number of an
index register to be used on the Device tab of the PLC parameter setting
screen in GX Works2.
POINT
When the start number of the index register used is changed on the Device tab
of the PLC parameter setting screen, do not change the parameters only or do
not write only the parameters into the programmable controller. Be sure to write
the parameters into the programmable controller with the program.
When the parameter is forced to be written into the programmable controller,
an error of CAN'T EXE. PRG. occurs. (Error code: 2500)
App. - 64
(c) Device for which indexing can be used
Indexing can be used only for the devices shown below.
• ZR: Serial number access format file register
• D: Extended data register
• W: Extended link register
(d) Usable range of index registers

The following table shows the usable range of index registers for indexing
with 32-bit index registers.
For indexing with 32-bit index registers, the specified index register (Zn)
and the next index register of the specified register (Zn+1) are used. Be
sure not to overlap index registers to be used.
Setting value Index registers to be used Setting value Index registers to be used
Z0 Z0, Z1 Z10 Z10, Z11
Z1 Z1, Z2 Z11 Z11, Z12
Z2 Z2, Z3 Z12 Z12, Z13
Z3 Z3, Z4 Z13 Z13, Z14
Z4 Z4, Z5 Z14 Z14, Z15
Z5 Z5, Z6 Z15 Z15, Z16
Z6 Z6, Z7 Z16 Z16, Z17
Z7 Z7, Z8 Z17 Z17, Z18
Z8 Z8, Z9 Z18 Z18, Z19
Z9 Z9, Z10 Z19 Cannot be specified.
(e) The following shows an example of indexing and the actual process device.
(When Z0 (32-bit) is 100000 and Z2 (16-bit) is -20)
Ladder example Actual process device
X0
DMOV K100000 Z0 X1
MOV ZR101000 D10
MOV K-20 Z2
Description
X1 ZR1000Z0 ZR(1000+100000)=ZR101000
MOV ZR1000Z0 D30Z2 D30Z2 D(30-20)=D10
App. - 65
(2) When specifying the 32-bit indexing using "ZZ" specification
(a) One index register can specify 32-bit indexing using "ZZ" specification such
as "ZR0ZZ4".
The following shows the 32-bit indexing with "ZZ" specification.
M0
DMOVP K100000 Z4 Stores 100000 at Z4 and Z5.
M0 Indexing ZR device with 32-bit

MOVP K100 ZR0ZZ4 index registers (Z4 and Z5)
ZR (0+100000) =ZR100000
(b) Specification method

For 32-bit indexing using "ZZ" specification, select "Use ZZ" in [Indexing
Setting for ZR Device] in the Device tab in PLC parameter setting screen.
(c) Device for which indexing can be used

Indexing can be used only for the devices shown below.
• ZR: Serial number access format file register
• D: Extended data register
• W: Extended link register
(d) Usable range of index registers

The following table shows the usable range of index registers in 32-bit
indexing with "ZZ" specification.
The 32-bit indexing with "ZZ" specification is specified as the format
ZRmZZn.
Specifying ZRmZZn enables Zn and Zn+1 of 32-bit values to index the
device number of ZRm.
"ZZ" "ZZ"
Index registers to be used Index registers to be used
specification* specification*
□ZZ0 Z0, Z1 □ZZ10 Z10, Z11
□ZZ1 Z1, Z2 □ZZ11 Z11, Z12
□ZZ2 Z2, Z3 □ZZ12 Z12, Z13
□ZZ3 Z3, Z4 □ZZ13 Z13, Z14
□ZZ4 Z4, Z5 □ZZ14 Z14, Z15
□ZZ5 Z5, Z6 □ZZ15 Z15, Z16
□ZZ6 Z6, Z7 □ZZ16 Z16, Z17
□ZZ7 Z7, Z8 □ZZ17 Z17, Z18
□ZZ8 Z8, Z9 □ZZ18 Z18, Z19
□ZZ9 Z9, Z10 □ZZ19 Cannot be specified.
*: □ indicates a device name (ZR, D, W) for indexing target
App. - 66
(e) The following shows an example of the 32-bit indexing with "ZZ"
specification and the actual processing device.
(When Z0 (32-bit) is 100000 and Z2 (16-bit) is -20)
Ladder example Actual process device

X0
X1
DMOV K100000 Z0
MOV ZR101000 D10
MOV K-20 Z2 Description

ZR1000Z0 ZR(1000+100000)=ZR101000
X1
D30Z2 D(30-20)=D10
MOV ZR1000Z0 D30Z2
(f) Available functions for "ZZ" specification

The 32-bit indexing specification with "ZZ" specification applies to the
following functions of GX Works2.
No. Function name and description

1 Specifying devices in program instruction
2 Entry device monitor
3 Device test
4 Device test with conditions
5 Monitor condition setting
Sampling trace
6
(Trace point (specifying devices), trace target device)
POINT
ZZn cannot be used alone as a device like "DMOV K100000 ZZ0".

When setting values of index registers to specify 32-bit indexing with "ZZ"
specification, set the value of Zn (Z0 to Z19).
ZZn alone cannot be input to each function of GX Works2.
For details, refer to the QnUCPU User's Manual Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals and MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction).
App. - 67
Appendix 9 FB
Appendix 9.1 FB
FB is an abbreviation for a Function Block that is designed to convert a ladder block,
which is used repeatedly in a sequence program, into a component (FB) to be
utilized in a sequence program.
This not only increases the efficiency of program development but also reduces
programming mistakes to improve program quality.
Converted into FB
a component
Figure App. 9.1 Converting a sequence program into a component
Appendix 9.1.1 Conversion into components

The following section explains the process to convert a simple program into a
component.
1) Program to be converted into a 2) Divide into input and output. In addition,
component replace the internal device with an internal label.
Input Output
X1 label i_Count label
INCP D1 i_Count INCP m_Cnt
D1 K12 Y12 m_Cnt K12 o_C_UP o_c_up
Input Internal device Output Internal label
3) When changed to an FB 4) Pasting the FB to a program

Count process 1
X1
Count_Num1
Y12
i_Count o_C_UP
Count_Num
i_Count o_C_UP
Count process 2
X2
Count_Num2
Y22
i_Count o_C_UP
Input label Output label Create input/output ladders (Setting parameter).
Figure App. 9.2 Flow of conversion into components
App. - 68
Appendix 9.1.2 Advantages of using FBs
This section introduces advantages of creating programs by using FBs.
(1) Easy programming

A sequence program can be created simply by pasting FBs. This significantly
reduces the program development man-hours. (FB libraries provided by
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. makes programming easier.)
Only select an FB from the Selection window

and drag and drop it to paste.
(2) Easy reading

Using an FB creates a simple program with only a "box" (FB), an input, and an
output to create an easy-to-read sequence program.
App. - 69
(3) Reusing
Converting a standard program into a component allows the program to be
reused any number of times.
As a result, operations such as copying a sequence program and modifying a
device, which have often been required in the past, will be unnecessary.
Converted FB for
into a component start control
FB for FB for FB for

start control start control start control
(4) Improving quality

Converting a standard program into a component as an FB to reuse the
program allows development of programs of consistent quality, without relying
on the technological skill of the program developers.
When developers A and B are developing sequence programs for different
devices, using the same FB for the common processing enables the developers
to create consistent quality of sequence programs.
Common
FB
Developer A Developer B
Individual process Individual process
App. - 70
(5) Protecting assets
By setting up a block password, the created FB can be protected so that it
cannot be viewed.
Sequence program related Convert the program into an FB

to the technical know-how and protect it with a password.
Appendix 9.1.3 FB Libraries
An FB library is a collection of FBs that are usable in GX Works2 (Simple project).

Using an FB library enables easy setting and operation of MELSEC-Q/L modules
and partner products.
<Example of MELSEC-Q/L module>
FBs for partner products

Laser
Vision displacement
sensor RFID sensor
FB FB FB
CC-Link
Ethernet
Vision sensor RFID Laser displacement sensor
Partner product family
App. - 71
<Example of partner product>
FBs for partner products

Laser
Vision displacement
sensor RFID sensor
FB FB FB
CC-Link
Ethernet
Vision sensor RFID Laser displacement sensor
Partner product family
(1) FB library lineup

FB libraries include "FBs for MELSEC-Q/L modules" and "FBs for partner
products".
(2) How to obtain FB libraries

FB libraries can be obtained from Mitsubishi Electric FA site.
URL http://www.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/fa/index.html
For the procedure to obtain the FB libraries, refer to App. 9.2.2 "Preparations
prior to use of FB libraries".
App. - 72
Appendix 9.1.4 Development tool
GX Works2 (Simple project) ver 1.12N or later is required to develop sequence

programs using FBs.
POINT
Depending on the FB library, supporting versions of GX Works2 may differ.

For details, refer to the download page of each FB.
Appendix 9.1.5 FB specifications and precautions
The following specifications and precautions must be understood prior to using FBs.
1. An FB cannot be used in another FB.

2. Because an FB specific process is added when an FB is arranged, the
number of steps increases when compared to a ladder created without an FB.
3. FBs cannot be used in an interruption program.
4. FBs whose execution does not complete within a scan cannot be used in the
FOR to NEXT instruction loops or subroutine programs.
App. - 73
Appendix 9.2 Creating a program by using an FB library
This section explains the procedure to create a program by using an FB library.
Appendx 9.2.1 Programs to be created
This section explains how to use an FB library with an example of importing an

analog value from an analog input module.
Example) Reading an analog value to D10 from the analog input module (Q64AD)
when the switch (X2) is turned on.
The program can easily be created by using an FB library as follows.
When the switch (X2) is turned on, FB for reading AD conversion

data of the specified channel
Execution
command
Analog value
is input.
The analog value is stored in D10.
POINT
The FB created by a user is also available other than the FB in the FB library.
For the creation method of a new FB, refer to "MELSOFT GX Works2 FB Quick
Start Guide".
App. - 74
Appendix 9.2.2 Preparations prior to use of FB libraries
Before using an FB library, contact your distributor to obtain it.

(FB libraries will not be installed when installing GX Works2.)
The following explains operation procedures using the FB library for Q64AD as an
example.
1) As the file obtained from your distributor is a zip format file, unzip
"q64ad_v100a.zip".
2) Double-click "setup.exe" in "q64ad_v100a".
Double-click!
3) The screen for installation is displayed. Follow the instructions to complete the
installation.
4) The following dialog is displayed when the installation is completed. Click the
OK button to close the dialog.
Click!
This completes the preparation prior to use of FB libraries.
App. - 75
Appendix 9.2.3 Importing an FB library to projects
This section explains how to import an FB library for analog input module (Q64AD)
to be pasted to the program into a project.
Create a new project before the following operation.
(refer to section 2.3.2)
1) Click [Project] → [Library] → [Install].
1) Click!
3) Select! 2) The Install dialog box is displayed.
4) Click! 3) Select "Q64AD"from Library List.
5) Check!
4) Click the Refresh FB List button.
5) Check the library to import.
7) The imported FBs are displayed under FB_Pool in the Project view and displayed in the Selection
window.
App. - 76
Appendix 9.2.4 Pasting FBs
Drag and drop FBs to be pasted to the program window from the Project view or
Selection window. (Drag and drop from the Project view is possible from GX Works2
1.24A or later.)
Operating Procedure
1) Paste "M+Q64AD_ReadADVal" to the program window.
Selection window
From the Selection window

or Project view, drag and
drop an FB to the place
where the FB will be pasted.
Project window
2) The Input FB Instance Name dialog box is displayed.
For details of settings, refer to the next page.
App. - 77
Appendix 9.2.5 Setting names of the pasted FBs
When an FB library is pasted to the program window, a dialog to input a name of the
pasted FB (FB instance name) is displayed.
Instance name is a name to distinguish the FB.
A temporary name is automatically set to the instance name. To use the name as it
is, close the dialog by clicking OK .
Make sure that the same name does not exist in the same program when changing
the name.
In this section, the default is used.
Operating Procedure
1) Enter the FB instance name ("ReadADVal_1" in the example) and click the
OK button.
Enter the FB instance name.
Click
2) The FB is pasted to the program window.
POINT
When entering an instance name, note the following points.

• Case-sensitive
• A number cannot be set for the first letter.
• The maximum number of characters for an instance name is 16.
An error occurs if OK is clicked with the following setting.

(When the first letter is a number).
App. - 78
Appendix 9.2.6 Creating input and output ladders
Create the input ladder section and the output ladder section of the pasted FB to
complete the program.
Refer to the following figure and enter the information.
FB execution command FB is running: ON
Module mounting XY address: 80 Normal end: ON
Channel number: 1 Error end: ON
Stores the error code.
Stores the analog value.
Appendix 9.2.7 Performing conversion/compilation
Conversion/compilation is required to execute the completed program.

The following explains how to convert/compile all programs.
1) Click [Compile] → [Rebuild All].
1) Click!

the Yes button.
2) Click!
3) The compilation result is displayed in the

Output window.
3) Display!
App. - 79
Appendix 9.2.8 Writing sequence programs
For the procedure to write sequence programs, refer to section 2.7 (1) "Writing data
to the CPU".
Appendix 9.2.9 Operation check
For the procedure to check the operation of the created program, refer to section 2.8
Monitoring Ladder Program Status.
Turn on the switch (X2) and confirm that the analog value is read.
Turn on the switch

(X10).
The current analog

value is displayed.
Double-clicking the FB in the sequence program on the screen enables monitoring

of the sequence program status in the FB.
App. - 80
SH-081123ENG-A

Mitsubishi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY PRECAUTION

(Always read these instructions before using the products.)

Do not touch the movable portion.

Turn off the power before installing or removing the module.

When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible.

Print date *Textbook number Revision

© 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 1- 1 to 1-14

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX Works2 2- 1 to 2-64

2.1 Features of GX Works2··················································································································· 2- 3

CHAPTER 3 DEVICE AND PARAMETER OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 3- 1 to 3- 6

4.1 List of Instruction Explained in this Chapter ···················································································· 4- 1

CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION -PART 2- 5- 1 to 5-58

5.1 Notation of Values (Data) ················································································································ 5- 1

6.1 Test Function at Online ··················································································································· 6- 1

CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE 7- 1 to 7-26

7.1 Intelligent Function Module ············································································································· 7- 1

8.1 Simulation Function························································································································· 8- 1

9.1 Typical Trouble································································································································ 9- 1

APPENDIX App.- 1 to App.- 80

Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode ··········································································································· App.- 1

The related manuals are shown below.

(1) QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

If a programmable controller is assumed as a control ladder, it can be described by

Input relay Contacts for

Input circuit Internal sequential operation Output circuit Output module

Figure 1.1 Programmable controller configuration

A programmable controller is an electronic device centered around microcomputers.

Figure 1.2 Program

• A program consists of a large number of instruction words and

• The instructions contain instruction words and devices. In addition,

• The number of steps varies depending on the types of instructions

• The instructions repeat from the step number 0 to the END

15) 16) 17)

(1) Universal model

Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT)

Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed main base unit

Battery holder Battery for QCPU (Q7BAT)

Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU (Q8BAT) Extension cable

Q5 B extension base unit

Figure 1.3 MELSEC-QnUD module configuration (when Q3 DB is used)

Main base unit Extension base unit

Multiple CPU high speed main base unit

Module name Input Output

24VDC (positive common) –

• Memory cards are required when the data capacity exceeds

Standard File register Local device

Device comment Device initial value

Storage file used in latch Device comment Device initial value

Sampling Module error

*1: A memory card cannot be used for Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU.

Secure backup by long-term storage

(1) Wiring of I/O devices

Figure 1.4 Wiring of I/O devices

Main base unit(Q33B,Q35B,Q38D)B,Q312(D)B)

Base unit with

Base unit with five slots(Q35B)

Base unit with eight slots(Q38(D)B)

Base unit with 12 slots(Q312(D)B)

slot next to the one with